Document/ExhibitDescriptionPagesSize 1: 10-K/A Amendment to Form 10-K HTML 1.07M
2: EX-23.1 Consent of Experts or Counsel HTML 7K
3: EX-31.1 Certification per Sarbanes-Oxley Act (Section 302) HTML 13K
4: EX-31.2 Certification per Sarbanes-Oxley Act (Section 302) HTML 12K
5: EX-32.1 Certification per Sarbanes-Oxley Act (Section 906) HTML 8K
(Exact Name of Registrant as Specified in Its Charter)
Delaware (State or Other Jurisdiction of Incorporation or
Organization)
33-0723123 (IRS Employer Identification No.)
47300 Bayside Parkway, Fremont, California (Address of Principal Executive Offices)
94538 (Zip Code)
(510) 413-1200
(Registrant’s telephone number, including area code)
Securities registered pursuant to Section 12(b) of the
Act:
None
Securities registered pursuant to Section 12(g) of the
Act:
Common Stock, $0.0001 par value per share
Indicate by check mark if the Registrant is a well-known
seasoned issuer, as defined in Rule 405 of the Securities
Act. Yes o No þ
Indicate
by check mark if the Registrant is not required to file reports
pursuant to Section 13 or Section 15(d) of the
Act. Yes o No þ
Indicate
by check mark whether the Registrant: (1) has filed all
reports required to be filed by Section 13 or 15(d) of the
Securities Exchange Act of 1934 during the preceding
12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant
was required to file such reports), and (2) has been
subject to such filing requirements for the past
90 days. Yes þ No o
Indicate
by check mark if disclosure of delinquent filers pursuant to
Item 405 of
Regulation S-K is
not contained herein, and will not be contained, to the best of
Registrant’s knowledge, in definitive proxy or information
statements incorporated by reference in Part III of this
Form 10-K/ A or
any amendment to this
Form 10-K/
A. o
Indicate
by check mark whether the Registrant is a large accelerated
filer, an accelerated filer, or a non-accelerated filer. See
definition of “accelerated filer and large accelerated
filer” in
Rule 12b-2 of the
Exchange Act. (Check One):
o Large accelerated
filer þ Accelerated
filer o
Non-accelerated filer
Indicate
by check mark whether the Registrant is a shell company (as
defined in
Rule 12b-2 of the
Exchange
Act). Yes o No þ
As
of July 1, 2005 the aggregate market value of the shares of
common stock held by non-affiliates of the Registrant (based on
the closing price for the Registrant’s common stock as
quoted by The Nasdaq National Market on that date) was
approximately $366 million.
As
of March 29, 2006, there were 82,441,604 shares of the
Registrant’s common stock, $0.0001 par value per
share, outstanding. This is the only outstanding class of stock
of the Registrant.
The Lexar name and logo are trademarks that are federally
registered in the United States. The titles and logos associated
with our products appearing in this report, including
ActiveMemory, Image Rescue, JumpDrive, JumpGear, LockTight and
TouchGuard, are either federally registered trademarks or are
subject to pending applications for registration. Our trademarks
may also be registered in other jurisdictions. Other trademarks
or trade names appearing elsewhere in this report are the
property of their respective owners.
We are filing this Amendment No. 1 to our Annual Report on
Form 10-K for the
year ended December 31, 2005, which was originally filed
with the Securities and Exchange Commission (the
“SEC”) on March 16, 2006 (the “Annual
Report”) in order to: (1) include information required
by Part III of
Form 10-K, which
we originally expected to be incorporated by reference to our
definitive Proxy Statement to be delivered to our stockholders
in connection with our 2006 Annual Meeting of Stockholders;
(2) correspondingly delete Item 4A that was included
in the Annual Report, as that information is now included in
Part III of this Amendment No. 1; and (3) make
certain changes to Items 1, 1A, 3, 7, 8, 9A and
15 of the Annual Report. This Amendment No. 1 continues to
speak as of the date of the original filing of the Annual
Report, as we have not updated the disclosures contained in the
Annual Report to reflect any events that occurred at a later
date.
The filing of this Amendment No. 1 shall not be deemed an
admission that the original filing of the Annual Report, when
made, included any untrue statement of a material fact or
omitted to state a material fact necessary to make a statement
not misleading.
CAUTION REGARDING FORWARD-LOOKING STATEMENTS
Some of the statements contained in this Annual Report on
Form 10-K/ A
constitute forward-looking statements within the meaning of
Section 27A of the Securities Act of 1933 and
Section 21E of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934. These
forward-looking statements involve substantial risks and
uncertainties, including, among other things, statements
regarding our proposed acquisition by Micron, our anticipated
revenue and costs and expenses and our planned business
strategy. In some cases, you can identify these statements by
forward-looking words such as “may,”“might,”“will,”“should,”“could,”“expect,”“plan,”“intend,”“anticipate,”“believe,”“estimate,”“project” or
“continue” and variations of these words or comparable
words. In addition, any statements that refer to expectations,
projections or other characterizations of future events or
circumstances are forward-looking statements. These
forward-looking statements involve known and unknown risks,
uncertainties and situations that may cause our or our
industry’s actual results, level of activity, performance
or achievements to be materially different from any future
results, level of activity, performance or achievements
expressed or implied by these statements. The risk factors
contained in this report in the section entitled “Risk
Factors,” as well as any other cautionary language in this
report, provide examples of risks, uncertainties and events that
may cause our actual results to differ from the expectations
described or implied in our forward-looking statements. You
should also carefully review the risks described in other
documents we file from time to time with the SEC, including the
Quarterly Reports on
Form 10-Q that we
will file in 2006.
Although we believe that the expectations reflected in the
forward-looking statements are reasonable, we cannot guarantee
future results, levels of activity, performance or achievements.
You should not place undue reliance on these forward-looking
statements, which speak only as of the date of this report.
Except as required by law, we do not undertake to update or
revise any forward-looking statement, whether as a result of new
information, future events, or otherwise.
PART I
ITEM 1
BUSINESS
Company Overview
We design, develop, manufacture and market through our retail
and original equipment manufacturing (OEM) channels,
high-performance digital media products, as well as other flash
based storage products. Our digital media technologies are
incorporated by us or our customers into a variety of products
for consumer and professional markets that utilize digital media
for the capture and retrieval of digital content for the digital
photography, consumer electronics, computer, industrial and
communications markets. Our digital media products include a
variety of flash memory cards with a range of speeds, capacities
and value-added features.
Our digital media products also include our JumpDrive products,
which are high-speed, portable USB flash drives for consumer
applications that serve a variety of uses, including floppy disk
replacement, as well as digital media accessories and a variety
of connectivity products that link our media products to PCs and
other electronic host devices. In addition, we market and sell
controllers and other components to other manufacturers of flash
storage media. We also license our technology to certain third
parties.
Our digital media products enable customers to capture digital
images and download them quickly to a personal computer for
editing, distributing and printing. We offer flash cards in all
major media formats currently used by digital cameras and other
electronic host devices: CompactFlash, Memory Stick, Memory
Stick Duo, Memory Stick PRO, Memory Stick Duo PRO, Secure
Digital Card, mini Secure Digital, MultiMediaCard, Reduced-Size
MultiMediaCard and the xD Picture Card.
Many of the CompactFlash, Memory Stick, and Memory Stick PRO
products that we manufacture incorporate our patented controller
technology. Other flash cards, including the Secure Digital Card
and some of our JumpDrive products, incorporate third party
controllers that we purchase and combine with flash memory from
our suppliers, which are then assembled into a flash card by our
manufacturing partners. A third category of products, comprised
of xD Picture Card and readers, are products that we do not
currently manufacture, but purchase and resell from our
suppliers.
A flash memory controller determines, among other things, the
manner in which data is written to, and read from, the flash
memory and is important in determining the overall performance
of the flash card. We believe our high-performance flash cards
can record data faster than other cards available on the market.
This performance advantage is particularly noticeable when used
in advanced digital cameras that can take advantage of our
digital media’s write speed, or the rate at which our
digital media can capture a digital image. It is also
particularly noticeable when transferring large amounts of data
to our large capacity JumpDrive products.
Our JumpDrive product line consists of portable data storage
devices that link to a personal computer through a USB
connection to allow customers to easily store, transfer and
carry data. We introduced and began generating revenue from our
JumpDrive products during 2002, and we now market and sell a
variety of JumpDrive models that vary in functionality and
design. We will be updating this product line during 2006 to
include new designs, smaller form factors, and new added-value
features.
We participated in the MP3 market in 2005 with a limited range
of product offerings. However, we experienced significant
challenges in the market and did not pursue active expansion of
this category of products. We continue to be interested in this
market and are reevaluating our MP3 business strategy.
Our digital media reader/writers are products that facilitate
the transfer of digital images and other data files to personal
computers and other host devices without a direct connection to
the digital camera.
Our flash memory controller technology can also be applied to a
variety of consumer electronic applications, such as digital
music players, laptop computers, personal digital assistants,
telecommunication and network devices, digital cameras and
digital video recorders. In order to extend our technology into
these markets, we have selectively licensed our products and
technology to third parties in business sectors such as data
communications, telecommunications, and industrial, computing
and embedded markets. We have also initiated litigation and have
taken other means to protect our technology and increase our
licensing revenues.
Our principal executive offices are located at 47300 Bayside
Parkway, Fremont, California94538, and our telephone number is
510-413-1200. Our
website address is www.lexar.com. We are not including the
information contained on our website as a part of, or
incorporating it by reference into, this Annual Report on
Form 10-K/ A. We
make available, free of charge, through our website our Annual
Report on
Form 10-K,
Quarterly Reports on
Form 10-Q, Current
Reports on
Form 8-K and all
amendments to those reports as soon as reasonably practicable
after such material is electronically filed with or furnished to
the SEC.
On March 8, 2006, we entered into a definitive merger
agreement with Micron Technology, Inc. and a wholly owned
subsidiary of Micron. The merger agreement provides that, upon
the terms and subject to the conditions provided in the merger
agreement, Micron’s subsidiary will merge with and into
Lexar, with Lexar being the surviving corporation of the merger.
As a result of the merger: (i) Lexar will become a wholly
owned subsidiary of Micron; and (ii) each outstanding share
of our common stock will be converted into the right to receive
0.5625 shares of Micron common stock and Micron will assume
stock options held by our employees at the closing date with a
per share exercise price of $9.00 or lower.
The merger agreement contains representations and warranties of
each of the parties to the merger agreement and the assertions
embodied in those representations and warranties are qualified
by information in confidential disclosure schedules that the
parties delivered in connection with the execution of the merger
agreement. The parties reserve the right to, but are not
obligated to, amend or revise the merger agreement or the
disclosure schedules. In addition, certain representations and
warranties may not be accurate or complete as of any specified
date because they are subject to a contractual standard of
materiality different from those generally applicable to
stockholders or were used for the purpose of allocating risk
between the parties rather than establishing matters as facts.
Accordingly, investors should not rely on the representations
and warranties as characterizations of the actual state of
facts, or for any other purpose, at the time they were made or
otherwise. In the merger agreement each party made certain
covenants to the other that must be satisfied or waived prior to
the closing. The merger agreement provides that the obligations
of each party to consummate the merger are subject to the
satisfaction of certain conditions.
The merger agreement may be terminated under the following
conditions: by either Lexar or Micron upon the mutual agreement
of the parties; by either Lexar or Micron if the merger is not
consummated by December 6, 2006; by either Lexar or Micron
if a governmental entity has permanently enjoined, restrained or
prohibited the transaction; by either Lexar or Micron if the
merger agreement is not adopted by the required vote of our
stockholders; by Lexar if we have entered into a definitive
binding agreement for an alternative acquisition with respect to
a superior offer and paid Micron a termination fee, upon an
uncured material breach of Micron’s representations and
warranties or covenants or upon a material adverse effect on
Micron; or by Micron upon the occurrence of a Triggering Event
(as described below), an uncured material breach of our
representations and warranties or covenants or upon a material
adverse effect on Lexar.
For purposes of the merger agreement, a “Triggering
Event” includes any of the following events: our board of
directors shall have failed to recommend that our stockholders
vote to adopt the merger agreement, or shall have withdrawn,
amended or modified in a manner adverse to Micron its
recommendation in favor of the adoption of the merger agreement
by our stockholders; we fail to include the recommendation of
our board of directors in favor of the adoption of the merger
agreement by our stockholders in the proxy statement/ prospectus
contained in the registration statement on
Form S-4 to be
filed with the SEC by Micron; our board of directors fails to
reaffirm its recommendation in favor of the adoption of the
merger agreement within 10 days after Micron requests a
reaffirmation in writing; our board of directors fails to reject
or shall have approved or recommended any alternative
acquisition proposal; we shall have entered into any letter of
intent or contract relating to any alternative acquisition that
is a superior proposal consistent with the fiduciary duties of
our board of directors after providing Micron with notice
thereof and a reasonable opportunity (for five business days
after such notice) for Micron to adjust the terms and conditions
of the merger agreement to enable us to proceed with the merger
with Micron; a tender or exchange offer relating to our
securities shall have been commenced and we shall not have sent
to our security holders, within 10 business days, a statement
disclosing that we recommend rejection of the tender or exchange
offer; or we shall have breached any of the covenants relating
to non-solicitation of acquisition proposals or related matters
or willfully and materially breached any of the covenants with
respect to alternative acquisition proposals; or our board of
directors resolves to do any of the foregoing.
The foregoing description of the merger agreement is qualified
in its entirety by reference to the full text of the merger
agreement, a copy of which was filed as Exhibit 1.1 to the
Current Report on
Form 8-K that we
filed with the SEC on March 8, 2006.
In connection with the execution of the merger agreement, each
of our executive officers and each member of our board of
directors, in their capacities as our stockholders, entered into
a voting agreement with Micron, pursuant to which, among other
things, each of them agreed with Micron to vote in favor of the
proposed merger and agreed not to dispose of any shares of our
common stock held by such executive officer or director prior to
the consummation of the merger. The voting agreements will
terminate upon the earlier of the consummation of the proposed
merger or the termination of the merger agreement.
We and Micron have entered into a patent cross-license
agreement. Under the patent cross-license agreement, among other
things, each party granted to the other party and its
subsidiaries a royalty-free, fully-paid, non-exclusive, term
license, without the right to sublicense, to all patents and
applications owned by the granting party for use in certain
defined fields of use — flash memory products, in the
case of Lexar, and memory products, image sensors, and imaging
devices, but excluding controllers the designs for which were
not created by or for Micron, in the case of Micron. In
addition, we and Micron each agreed to release the other party
for any past infringements of the releasing party’s patents
that would have otherwise been within the field of use granted
to the released party under the patent cross-license agreement.
In the event of a change of control of either Lexar or Micron,
the patent cross-license agreement will continue to benefit and
obligate the party undergoing such change of control or its
successor entity; however, the license granted under the
agreement by the party not undergoing a change of control will
extend only to that part of the business relating to the
acquired party prior to such change of control and will
automatically become limited to an annual sales revenue of the
acquired party’s licensed products sold by the acquired
party in the 12 months immediately preceding the change of
control.
The patent cross-license agreement is effective until
March 8, 2011 unless earlier terminated as provided in the
agreement. Provided that (i) we have neither consummated an
alternative acquisition nor entered into a definitive agreement
or letter of intent with respect to an alternative acquisition
and (ii) Micron has not terminated the merger agreement
upon the occurrence of a triggering event as defined in the
merger agreement, the cross-license agreement may be terminated
on March 8, 2007 by the following parties if the merger
agreement is terminated under the following conditions: by
either party upon the mutual agreement of the parties; by either
party if the merger is not consummated by December 6, 2006;
by either party if a governmental entity has permanently
enjoined, restrained or prohibited the transaction; by either
party if the merger agreement is not adopted by the required
vote of our stockholders; by Lexar upon an uncured material
breach of Micron’s representations and warranties or an
uncured willful breach of Micron’s covenants under the
merger agreement, or upon a material adverse effect with respect
to Micron; and by Micron upon an uncured material breach of our
representations and warranties or an uncured willful breach of
our covenants or upon a material adverse effect with respect to
Lexar.
In the event of a change of control of either Lexar, in
accordance with the terms of the merger agreement, or Micron,
the cross-license agreement will continue, until March 8,2011, to benefit and obligate the party undergoing the change of
control or its successor entity; however, the license granted to
the acquired party by the party not undergoing a change in
control will extend only to that part of the business relating
to the acquired party prior to such change of control and will
automatically become limited to an annual sales revenues of the
acquired party’s licensed products sold by the acquired
party in the 12 months immediately preceding such change of
control.
The foregoing description of the patent cross-license agreement
is qualified in its entirety by reference to the full text of
the patent cross-license agreement, a copy of which was filed as
Annex D to the registration statement on Form S-4 that
Micron filed with the SEC on March 28, 2006.
Unless otherwise indicated, the discussions in this document
relate to Lexar as a stand-alone entity and do not reflect the
impact of the proposed merger with Micron. Micron filed a
registration statement on
Form S-4 with the
SEC on March 28, 2006 containing a proxy statement/
prospectus that, when final, will detail a meeting of our
stockholders to enable our stockholders to vote to adopt the
merger agreement and approve the merger. The definitive proxy
statement/ prospectus will be sent to all of our stockholders as
of the record date for the meeting and will contain important
information about us, the merger, risks relating to the
merger and related matters. We strongly encourage our
stockholders to read this definitive proxy statement/ prospectus
when available.
Our Products and Services
Retail Channel. We offer our digital media products
through our retail channel in a variety of speeds and capacities
to satisfy the various demands of different users of flash
cards. We are one of only two companies to offer all major media
formats currently used by digital cameras and other electronic
host devices: CompactFlash, Memory Stick, Memory Stick Duo,Memory Stick PRO, Secure Digital, or SD, Card, mini Secure
Digital, micro Secure Digital, MultiMediaCard, Reduced-Size
MultiMediaCard and the xD Picture Card. Each of these types of
flash cards is referred to as a distinct “form
factor.” Each form factor generally is of a unique size and
has a different set of connections to its intended host device.
Over the last few years, the Secure Digital Card has generally
increased its market share while CompactFlash has decreased on a
relative basis to other form factors. Our digital media is
compatible with substantially all digital cameras, and we
typically guarantee purchasers of our products that our digital
film will work seamlessly with any product that uses the
particular form factor. The growth of the use of flash cards in
cell phones has begun to create demand for after-market sales
and we are seeing opportunities for sales in that market of SD
and Memory Stick Duo form factors, as well as new smaller form
factors.
We differentiate our flash card business by customer needs:
•
The Professional line is targeted at the professional
photographer and offers a range of high-speed, high-performance
products that meet the demanding requirements of this segment.
These products have the highest speed-rating in our product
line. They are complemented by Professional card readers that
offer high-speed downloads for multiple cards simultaneously.
•
The Platinum line is targeted to the photography enthusiast and
offers a full range of speed-rated cards that are ideal for
fast-action photography and video capture.
•
The “Value” line is targeted to the mass market and
includes a full range of non-speed rated cards that are suitable
for cameras, PDAs, and other multi-media devices.
•
We offer a version of the Memory Stick Pro Duo specifically
targeted to the gaming community.
•
We displayed our solutions for cell phones as a separate mobile
line at the Consumer Electronics Show 2006, held in early
January 2006.
In addition to offering flash memory cards in a variety of
speeds and capacities, we are also offering more advanced
features in some of our flash media card products, such as Write
Acceleration, or WA, technology, the
ActiveMemorytm
System and
LockTighttm
CompactFlash. Our Write Acceleration technology is designed to
provide additional performance advantages when enabled by
firmware residing in both the digital camera and CompactFlash
card. When a WA-enabled camera detects a WA-enabled card, the
two are able to transfer data with less overhead, thereby
increasing write speed. WA-enabled cameras include certain
models of Kodak Professional, Nikon, Olympus, Pentax, Sanyo and
Sigma digital cameras. Our ActiveMemory System is a technology
designed to optimize digital photography workflow to enable
enhanced productivity in and out of the photo studio.
ActiveMemory-enabled Professional CompactFlash cards enable
photographers to store user preferences and host device settings
in a protected area on the card. Our LockTight technology is a
digital image security solution that utilizes 160-bit encryption
technology and incorporates an
easy-to-use feature for
establishing security settings on the memory card and
corresponding digital camera. Digital content stored on the
memory card can only be accessed via the digital camera with the
corresponding encryption key or via a personal computer with a
valid username and password. Flash memory cards enabled with our
Write Acceleration, ActiveMemory and LockTight technologies are
compatible with substantially all digital cameras, even if such
cameras are unable to take advantage of these advanced features.
In the second quarter of 2004, we entered into an exclusive,
multi-year agreement with Eastman Kodak whereby we offer digital
media for sale to customers under the Kodak brand name on a
worldwide basis. We began introducing such products in the third
quarter of 2004. Sales of Kodak branded products have steadily
increased through the fourth quarter of 2005. As a percentage of
our product revenues, sales of Kodak branded product increased
through the second quarter of 2005 and maintained its percentage
of revenues during the third and fourth quarter of 2005.
To address the growing market for compact digital data and media
storage solutions, we also market our JumpDrive products. We
introduced and began generating revenue from our JumpDrive
products during 2002, and we now market and sell several
different JumpDrive models in a range of sizes, memory
capacities, speeds and functionality, to target specific
consumer needs. Our JumpDrive products range from models that
offer basic storage capabilities like JumpDrive Classic,
JumpDrive Expression, and JumpDrive Sport, to products with
enhanced performance and functionality. These include:
•
JumpDrive Lightning — our premium JumpDrive product,
which offers a 120x (18MB/sec) minimum sustained write speed
capability and a 160x (24 MB/sec) minimum sustained read
speed capability, password protection, 256-bit AES encryption
and file synchronization;
•
JumpDrive Secure — a rugged, portable USB storage
device with encrypted password protected security software for
PCs and Macs, which is designed to protect data from
unauthorized access; and
•
JumpDrive TouchGuard — a USB flash drive with an
integrated biometric fingerprint sensor to authenticate a
user’s identity and provide easy access to secured files
and password protected web sites;
We label some of our CompactFlash, Secure Digital and JumpDrive
products with write speed performance in which 1x is equal to a
sustained write speed of 150 kilobytes per second, nomenclature
similar to that used in the CD-ROM industry. For example, our 4x
CompactFlash digital film is capable of minimum sustained write
speeds of at least 600 kilobytes per second. Currently, we offer
CompactFlash, Secure Digital and JumpDrive flash drives capable
of minimum sustained write speeds up to 133x, 133x and 120x,
respectively.
We offer a broad line of digital media accessories such as
reader/writers and other accessory products. Our reader/writer
products facilitate the transfer of digital images and other
data files directly to personal computers or other host devices
through a USB or Firewire port without a direct connection to
the digital camera. We also offer accessory products, including
our Image Rescue 2.0, that recovers lost or deleted image files
(JPEG, TIFF and RAW) from a CompactFlash card, even if the card
has become corrupted.
Retail sales represented 84.7% of our net revenues in 2003,
91.5% of our net revenues in 2004 and 75.0% of our net revenues
in 2005.
OEM Channel: Our OEM channel sales consist primarily of
kits consisting of our controller with other components, such as
flash memory, as well as our controllers sold as a stand-alone
product, to original equipment manufacturers and companies that
target the flash card market.
Our controller customers often integrate these controllers in
their own USB flash drives and market them primarily to major
personal computer OEM customers. Generally, our agreements with
our controller customers have a one-year term and are
automatically renewed for an additional one-year term unless
either party provides the other party with written notice of
non-renewal at least 90 days prior to the end of the
one-year term. We also provide the purchaser with a one-year
warranty and intellectual property indemnification.
Our components business grew rapidly in 2005 because of the
general industry shortage in flash memory. Our component
customers include OEMs and companies that serve retail card
markets. This business is opportunistic and generally depends on
tight flash supply conditions to be successful.
Sales in our OEM channel represented 11.0% of our net revenue in
2003, 7.5% in 2004, and 23.1% in 2005.
Licensing: During October 2005, we entered an agreement
that extended the term of the original Samsung license agreement
for five years through March 2011 and significantly expanded the
scope of the original license agreement to cover Samsung
products that were not previously included in the original
license grant. As a result, we received significant non
recurring license payments during the fourth quarter of 2005 and
the first quarter of 2006. The payments received under this
agreement are being recognized over a 3 year period
beginning in November 2005.
We also have license agreements with Sony. Unless extended, the
Sony license agreement terminates in March 2010. Prior to
termination, either party can terminate the agreement only in
the event of the other party’s breach of the agreement, the
other party’s challenge to the validity of the licensed
technology or the other party’s bankruptcy. We have the
right to assign this license in the event we are acquired. We do
not provide any intellectual property indemnification to Sony
under the license agreement.
In the fourth quarter of 2005, we received $7.6 million in
variable royalties from our licensees. Variable based royalties
recognized in 2005 aggregated $13.5 million, of which
$5.3 million related to sales in 2004.
As we license our patents to certain of our competitors,
competition will increase and may harm our business, financial
condition and results of operations. Currently we are engaged in
licensing discussions and/or litigation with several of our
competitors. There can be no assurance that we will be
successful in concluding licensing agreements or resolve these
litigation matters under terms that are favorable to us, or at
all.
Sales and Marketing
We sell our digital media and connectivity products to end-users
primarily through retail and OEM channels. The retail channel
includes national, international and regional retailers and
select corporate accounts. We also use a direct sales force, as
well as distributors, value-added resellers and independent
sales representatives, for retail channel sales. The retail
channel also includes specialty stores targeted at professional
photographers and enthusiasts. The OEM channel includes digital
camera manufacturers and other private label resellers.
Our growth in product revenues during 2005 was largely driven by
opportunistic sales of other components through the OEM channel.
Increased sales into the retail market continued to reflect the
seasonality to our business. For example, our retail shipments
typically increase significantly in our fiscal fourth quarter
due to seasonal consumer demand during the holidays.
We currently sell our products in the United States, Europe,
Asia and other parts of the world, either directly, through our
wholly owned subsidiaries located in Japan and the U.K., or
through international distributors. We have sales and marketing
offices in Australia, Hong Kong, Shanghai and Singapore. We also
market our products directly to end users through our website.
In connection with the majority of our distributor sales, we pay
commissions to independent contractors based upon the sales to
their clients from our distributors. In addition, we do business
with certain of our customers on a consignment basis.
To support our sales efforts, we conduct marketing programs
designed to educate our target markets about the differences in
digital media offerings. Our marketing programs include
merchandising programs, in-store promotions, trade events,
participation in consumer educational events, involvement with
certain well-known professional photographers and photography
companies, and print advertising. We introduced a
Pro Photography website during the year to provide an
education resource and destination site for or photography
enthusiasts and to enhance brand affinity with our target
customers.
Customers
Our customers include retailers, distributors, OEMs and
licensees. During 2005, revenues from one customer, Wal-Mart
(including Sam’s Club), represented 19.6% of our gross
revenues.
During 2005, approximately 37.2% of our total net product
revenues were generated by customers outside North America,
consisting of approximately 13.7% from Europe, 2.8% from Japan,
and 20.7% from other countries.
We protect some of our customers against the effects of price
decreases on their inventories. Accordingly, if we reduce our
prices, we pay certain distributors and consumer retailers the
difference between the price paid for the product still in their
inventory and the reduced price. Additionally, many of our
retail customers
and distributors have the right to return limited amounts of
products still in their inventory for credit. We also offer
in-store and mail in rebates to end-users through some of our
customers.
Competition
Our industry is characterized by intense competition, supply
shortages or oversupply, rapid technological change, evolving
industry standards, declining average selling prices and rapid
product obsolescence. Our existing competitors include many
large domestic and international companies that have longer
operating histories and have or may have greater brand name
recognition, greater access to flash memory, substantially
greater financial, technical, marketing and other resources,
broader product lines and longer standing relationships with
retailers, OEMs and end users. As a result, these competitors
may be able to better absorb price declines, ensure more stable
supply, adapt more quickly to new or emerging technologies or
devote greater resources to the promotion and sale of their
products than we may. Ultimately, this may lead to a decrease in
our sales and market share and have a material adverse effect on
our business, financial condition and results of operations.
We compete with semiconductor companies that manufacture and
sell flash memory chips or flash memory cards. These include
Hynix, Infineon, Micron, Renesas, Samsung, SanDisk, ST Micro and
Toshiba. Micron and Intel have recently formed a joint venture
known as IM Flash Technologies, LLC. SanDisk and Toshiba jointly
develop and manufacture both low-cost and high-performance flash
memory through their Flash Vision joint venture. Because flash
memory represents a significant portion of the cost of flash
media, SanDisk and other flash manufacturers may have a
competitive advantage and may have access to flash memory at
prices substantially below the prices that our suppliers charge
us. SanDisk has other competitive advantages in that it also
collects substantial royalties pursuant to license agreements
with Samsung and others. SanDisk also collects royalties on the
manufacture and sale of SD Cards. In conjunction with the
SanDisk/ Samsung license agreement, SanDisk has announced that
Samsung sells flash to SanDisk at very favorable pricing.
We also face significant competition from manufacturers or card
assemblers and resellers that either resell flash cards
purchased from others or assemble cards from controllers and
flash memory chips purchased from companies such as Renesas,
Samsung or Toshiba, into flash cards. These competitors include
Crucial Technology, a division of Micron, Dane-Elec, Delkin
Devices, Feiya, Fuji, Hagiwara, Hama, Hewlett Packard, Data I/
O, Infineon, Kingston, Kodak, M-Systems, Matsushita, Memorex,
Memory Plus, Micron, PNY, PQI, Pretec, Ritek, Samsung, SanDisk,
Silicon Storage Technology, SimpleTech, SMART Modular
Technologies, Sony, TDK, Transcend, Viking InterWorks and many
others.
In addition, an increasing number of companies are manufacturing
their own controllers, including Genesys, Hyperstone, Prolific,
SanDisk, Sigmatel, Silicon Storage Technology, Silicon Motion
Inc. (SMI), Solid State System, Sony and Zoran. Such companies
either combine their controllers with flash memory from third
parties to manufacture their own flash cards or sell their
controllers to third parties who use them to assemble flash
cards. Additionally, major semiconductor companies such as
Infineon, Micron, Renesas, Samsung and Toshiba have also
developed or are currently developing their own controllers that
will likely compete with our controller and/or card sales.
Furthermore, many companies have introduced USB flash drives
that compete directly with our JumpDrive line of products. These
include Apacer, Belkin, Fuji, Imation, Iomega, JMTek, KTI
Networks, Memorex, M-Systems, Netac, PNY, Samsung, SanDisk,
SimpleTech, Sony, Trek and many others.
Many of our competitors are larger than we are and, because they
manufacture their own controllers and/or flash memory, do not
depend to the extent we do on third parties to supply them with
those products. Flash memory has been in short supply for a
number of quarters which has resulted in our flash costs
decreasing at a slower rate than product pricing in the market.
Companies that manufacture their own flash memory will have a
significant advantage so long as this allocation situation
continues.
Our competitors have also introduced certain flash card formats.
For example, a consortium consisting of SanDisk, Matsushita and
Toshiba have developed the Secure Digital Card, a media format
used in digital
cameras as well as in other electronic applications, and Fuji
and Olympus introduced the xD Picture Card. Although we
currently sell these flash memory products, which we source from
third parties, we must incur significant royalties or higher
costs to do so and may not be able to do so in the future at a
reasonable rate or at all. In addition, SanDisk has introduced
TransFlash, or MicroSD, which is designed to be used in cell
phone applications. If we are unable to obtain the rights to
manufacture these products, our business will be adversely
affected. We are also behind in achieving higher densities in
certain products such as Memory Stick Pro Duo and MicroSD. If we
are unable to achieve these densities, our business will be
adversely affected.
We also face competition from some manufacturers of traditional
film products. Kodak and Fuji are the largest and best-known
manufacturers of traditional film products. Fuji has entered the
flash card market, but does not yet manufacture its own flash
cards. In 2004, we entered into an agreement with Kodak to sell
flash cards under the Kodak brand on a worldwide basis. With
their resources and worldwide brand recognition, if we were to
lose the rights to sell products under that brand, Fuji and
Kodak would be formidable competitors for our core business.
Several companies, such as Cornice, IBM, and Matrix
Semiconductor, which was acquired by SanDisk in 2005, have
introduced competing technologies for use in digital cameras.
These include products such as Digital Capture Technology and
the MicroDrive. Although the cost per megabyte of rotating media
such as Digital Capture Technology and the MicroDrive is lower
than that of flash cards, rotating media has historically had
higher power consumption and lower reliability than flash cards.
Compact discs can also be used as a storage medium for digital
cameras and other devices, and, while inexpensive, are quite
bulky. We expect to continue to face competition from existing
or future competitors that design and market similar or
alternative data storage solutions that may be less costly or
provide additional features. If a manufacturer of digital
cameras or other consumer electronic devices designs one of
these alternative competing standards into its products, the
digital media we manufacture, as currently configured, will not
be compatible with that product and our revenues may decline,
which would result in a material adverse effect on our business.
Our markets historically have not lent themselves to
standardized definitions. Accordingly, our market data is not
broken down in any standardized fashion. This is in part because
our products involve rapidly evolving technologies, and because
demand for our products is derivative of host technologies that
are themselves evolving. As a result, we believe that market
data is inconclusive as an indication of total sales or relative
share. Lexar, by some estimates, is the second largest seller of
flash cards through U.S. retail channels. According to some
data, we hold a top vendor position in certain narrowly
delineated categories, (such as measuring certain categories of
U.S. retail sales), though we are unable to confirm these
estimates or measurements. We do not have reliable total market
data for international or OEM sales, which comprise a sizable
part of our business. Other measures of market performance, such
as worldwide NAND flash sales, do not typically include us at
all, though we have sales in these product categories.
Performance measured in these categories may not be a meaningful
predictor of future sales.
We believe the principal competitive factors in the digital
media market are price, performance, capacity, design and
service, as well as the technologies adopted in host devices,
monetary exchange rates and other factors that affect demand for
our products. We have historically competed by offering premium
products with superior performance and service at competitive
prices. In 2005, we changed our pricing strategy and did not
aggressively match product price declines in the market unless
and until our costs adjusted in a way that would allow us to do
so. However, in the first quarter of 2006, we have had to adjust
our strategy and we have significantly lowered our prices to
remain competitive in the market place. We believe that the
superior performance of products manufactured with our
proprietary controller, such as our CompactFlash cards and some
of our JumpDrive products, is primarily related to their
capability for higher sustained write speeds, which means that
data can be written to the flash card more quickly. This is
particularly important to enable users to capture multiple
photos in quick succession or full motion video.
Technology
Our technology is the result of more than ten years of research
and development. As part of the Solid-State Storage Business
Unit of Cirrus Logic, Inc., which we acquired in 1996, our
engineering group initially
pioneered mass storage controller devices to work with magnetic
devices. This expertise expanded into controllers for
solid-state storage systems, and more specifically for flash
memory. Solid-state storage systems have no moving parts. As of
March 13, 2006, we had 96 patents granted or allowed in the
United States or other countries, while an additional 91 remain
pending in the United States Patent and Trademark Office and
foreign jurisdictions. Most of our patents revolve around our
core expertise in developing and designing a programmable
controller and achieving system-level performance. We are
actively pursuing companies which are marketing products that we
believe infringe our patents.
Our patented system and circuit technology and proprietary Space
Manager technologies enable high write speed operations to the
flash memory with minimal overhead. We believe our high-speed
technology provides an advantage when used in applications
requiring large amounts of data to be transferred quickly, such
as digital imaging and digital sound recordings. Our controllers
integrate various digital and advanced analog modules by using a
combination of proprietary and standardized tools. We believe
our controller technology enables us to provide a high
performance solution to our customers, while remaining
cost-effective.
Our patented controller architecture also allows the
controller’s operating software, which we refer to as
firmware, to reside in the flash storage device. The firmware is
downloaded into the controller’s internal random access
memory for execution and can easily be upgraded using simple
utilities. This feature allows us to reprogram the firmware for
any specific host requirements, such as optimized firmware for
digital cameras or other digital devices. As a result, we can
provide digital film solutions with high-performance and low
power consumption without physically altering the digital
storage device.
Research and Development
We believe that in order to compete successfully, we must
continually design, develop and introduce new products that take
advantage of market opportunities and address emerging
standards. As of March 13, 2006, we had a staff of 50
research, development and engineering personnel. In addition, we
have, on occasion, engaged outside consultants to assist in the
development of technologies to our specifications. We intend to
continue this selective use of outside consultants in the
future. During 2003, 2004, and 2005, we spent approximately
$8.1 million, $10.5 million, and $13.1 million,
respectively, on research and development activities.
In addition, we endeavor to develop and maintain close
relationships with key suppliers of components and technologies
in order to enable us to quickly introduce new products that
incorporate the latest technologies. We also receive prototypes
of digital camera models from manufacturers prior to their
market introduction to ensure compatibility with our digital
film. We have also worked with some digital camera manufacturers
to optimize the performance of their digital camera when used
with our digital film. We believe our relationships with digital
camera manufacturers provide valuable insights into their
current and future requirements.
Manufacturing and Operations
We have three basic categories of products. Many of the
CompactFlash, Memory Stick and Memory Stick Pro cards that we
manufacture use our patented controller technology, and some
incorporate features for USB connectivity, security and image
recovery. Other flash cards, including the Secure Digital Card
and our JumpDrive products, incorporate third party controllers
that we purchase and combine with flash memory from our
suppliers when we manufacture the flash card. Finally, some
other products, including the xD Picture Card and our
readers and digital music players, are products that we do not
currently manufacture, but purchase and resell from our
suppliers in order to meet the demand of our markets. We are
planning to expand to manufacture additional digital media
formats with our proprietary controller technology in 2006.
We contract with an independent foundry and assembly and testing
organizations to manufacture flash media products. This allows
us to focus on our design efforts, minimize fixed costs and
capital expenditures and gain access to advanced manufacturing
capabilities. We maintain a comprehensive quality and testing
program to help ensure that our products meet our quality
standards. We also typically require that our major
subcontractors are ISO 9002 certified.
There are three major types of flash memory: NAND, AND and NOR.
We typically use industry standard NAND flash memory. Our
controllers can also be configured to work with NAND flash
memory produced by Hynix, Micron, ST Micro, Samsung or Toshiba,
as well as AND flash memory produced by Renesas. Our controller
technology can also be applied to other proprietary types of
flash memory or other solid-state storage devices such as NROM
from Infineon or ORNAND from Spansion.
Under a supply agreement we finalized with Samsung in April
2001, we purchase the majority of our flash memory from Samsung,
which is priced based upon an agreed methodology. Samsung has
guaranteed a certain allocation of flash memory production
capacity to us. In addition, Samsung also has the right to
purchase our flash memory controllers. Under the agreement,
Samsung provides us with intellectual property indemnification
for the products we purchase from Samsung, as well as industry
standard warranties. In October 2005, we agreed to extend our
supply agreement with Samsung until March 2011, unless the
agreement is earlier terminated as a result of a party’s
breach of the agreement or bankruptcy.
United Microelectronics Corporation, or UMC, and Silicon Motion,
Inc., or SMI, each based in Taiwan, currently manufacture most
of our controller chips. Our flash cards are primarily assembled
and tested by PC Partner in China; Macrotron and Power Digital
Card in Taiwan; Venture Manufacturing Services in Singapore and
Indonesia; and Venture Manufacturing, Vitron, Macrotron and PC
Partner in the United States. We do not have a long-term
agreement with Vitron, Venture Manufacturing or PC Partner and
typically obtain services from them on a per order basis.
Additionally, our controllers are assembled, tested and packaged
primarily by Advanced Semiconductor Engineering in Taiwan and
Advanced Interconnection Technologies in Indonesia and in the
United States. In August 2003, we entered into a supply
agreement with UMC under which we are obligated to provide UMC
with a rolling forecast of our anticipated purchase orders. Such
forecasts may only be changed by a certain percentage each
month. This limits our ability to react to significant
fluctuations in demand for our products. The agreement with UMC
has been extended through December 31, 2006. We have also
entered into a supply agreement with SMI, whereby SMI supplies
us with controllers for certain of our digital media products.
We are obligated to provide rolling forecasts to SMI and SMI has
agreed to maintain a buffer stock to meet our needs. SMI also
provides us with standard warranty and indemnity protections.
This agreement runs through September 2007 and may be terminated
by either party in the event of the other party’s
bankruptcy or breach of the agreement.
We maintain significant levels of inventories to meet customer
demand for products that we do not manufacture and to compensate
for irregular deliveries from our suppliers.
Backlog
We sell our products pursuant to standard purchase orders, which
are officially acknowledged by us according to our standard
terms and conditions. Due to industry practice, which allows
customers to cancel or reschedule orders with limited advance
notice to us prior to shipment without significant penalties,
and because many of our retail customers have a right to return
limited amounts of unsold product still in their inventory for
credit, we believe that our backlog, while useful for scheduling
production, is not a meaningful indicator of future sales.
Employees
At March 13, 2006, we had 325 full time employees, of which
136 were employed in marketing and sales, 50 in research,
development and engineering, 75 in operations and 64 in
administration. We also employ 28 temporary employees at
March 13, 2006. Our continued success will depend, in part,
on our ability to attract and retain skilled and motivated
personnel. None of our employees is represented by labor unions.
We believe that we have good relations with our employees.
ITEM 1A
RISK FACTORS
The factors discussed below are cautionary statements that
identify important factors that could cause actual results to
differ materially from those anticipated in the forward-looking
statements in this Annual Report on
Form 10-K/ A.
Failure to complete the merger with Micron could
materially and adversely affect our results of operations and
our stock price.
We entered into a definitive merger agreement and patent
cross-license with Micron Technology, Inc. on March 8,2006. Consummation of the merger is subject to customary closing
conditions, including antitrust approvals and approval by our
stockholders. We cannot assure you that these conditions will be
met or waived, that the necessary approvals will be obtained, or
that we will be able to successfully consummate the merger as
currently contemplated under the merger agreement or at all. If
the merger is not consummated:
•
we may not realize any or all of the potential benefits of the
merger, including any potential synergies that could result from
combining the financial, technical and manufacturing resources
of Micron and Lexar;
•
we will remain liable for significant transaction costs,
including legal, accounting, financial advisory and other costs
relating to the merger;
•
under some circumstances, we may have to pay a termination fee
to Micron in the amount of $22 million;
•
any operational investments that we may delay due to the pending
transaction would need to be made, potentially on an accelerated
timeframe, which could then prove costly and more difficult to
implement; and
•
the market price of our common stock may decline to the extent
that the current market price reflects a market belief that the
merger will be completed.
Additionally, the announcement of the pending merger may lead to
uncertainty for our employees and some of our customers and
suppliers. This uncertainty may mean:
•
the attention of our management and our employees may be
diverted from
day-to-day operations;
•
our customers and suppliers may seek to modify or terminate
existing agreements, or prospective customers may delay entering
into new agreements or purchasing our products as a result of
the announcement of the merger; and
•
our ability to attract new employees and retain our existing
employees may be harmed by uncertainties associated with the
merger.
The occurrence of any of these events individually or in
combination could materially and adversely affect our results of
operations and our stock price. If the proposed merger with
Micron is not consummated, we may be at a disadvantage to our
competitors.
During the pendency of the proposed merger with Micron, we are
prohibited from soliciting others to acquire Lexar. Further if
an unsolicited offer is made for Lexar at a more favorable
price, we may only enter into an alternative acquisition
transaction without Micron’s prior written approval if our
board of directors concludes after consultation with our outside
legal counsel and financial advisor that such proposal is
reasonably likely to result in a superior offer, we terminate
the merger agreement and pay a termination fee of
$22 million to Micron. Covenants in the merger agreement
also impede our ability to complete other transactions that are
not in the ordinary course of business but that could be
favorable to our stockholders.
The merger agreement provides for a fixed exchange ratio for the
number of shares of Micron common stock that will be issued for
each outstanding share of our common stock in the merger. If the
public trading value of shares of Micron common stock declines
over the period of time required to satisfy the merger’s
closing conditions, the consideration received at the time of
the merger may be lower than the public trading value of shares
of our common stock when we entered into the merger agreement.
Stockholder securities lawsuits have been filed against us
and our directors challenging the merger, and an unfavorable
judgment or ruling in these lawsuits could prevent or delay the
consummation of the merger and result in substantial costs to
us.
On March 9, 2006, March 10, 2006, March 20, 2006
and March 27, 2006, stockholder class actions were filed in
the Superior Court of the State of California for the County of
Alameda against Lexar and our directors asserting claims
relating to the merger agreement. The complaints allege that,
among other things, the defendants engaged in self-dealing and
breached their fiduciary duties in connection with the merger
agreement, and that the consideration to be received by our
stockholders pursuant to the merger agreement is inadequate.
Plaintiffs seek, among other things, unspecified monetary
damages, attorneys’ fees and certain forms of equitable
relief, including enjoining the consummation of the merger,
rescinding the merger agreement and imposing a constructive
trust. We have obligations under certain circumstances to hold
harmless and indemnify each of the defendant directors against
judgments, fines, settlements and expenses related to claims
against such directors and otherwise to the fullest extent
permitted under Delaware law and our bylaws and certificate of
incorporation. Such obligations may apply to these lawsuits. An
unfavorable outcome in these lawsuits could prevent or delay the
consummation of the merger and result in substantial costs to us.
We have a history of losses and may not be able to become
profitable.
We incurred net losses in both 2004 and 2005, including a net
loss of $23.8 million in the fourth quarter of 2005 and a
net loss of $36.2 million for fiscal 2005, and we expect to
continue to incur net losses for the foreseeable future. As of
December 31, 2005, we had an accumulated deficit of
approximately $203.7 million. Our ability to become
profitable depends on: the rate of price decreases for our
products; the cost of our components, particularly flash memory;
the growth of the markets for digital cameras or other host
devices that use digital storage media; the extent to which our
products, particularly our higher margin products, are accepted
by these markets; our ability to charge a premium for our higher
performance products; the success of our products and
distribution channel; our ability to control our operating
expenses, particularly our litigation costs; our ability to
generate increased licensing revenue from our intellectual
property; and our ability to adequately manage our inventories
and the challenges associated with the breadth and diversity of
our product offerings. We also must continue to reduce the costs
of producing and selling our flash media products by controlling
our internal and channel inventories, securing the best
available pricing for flash memory and components used in our
digital media products and reducing our manufacturing costs. If
we are unsuccessful in increasing revenues from our higher
margin products and controlling our operating expenses, we may
not be able to become profitable on a quarterly or an annual
basis.
Our products are characterized by average selling prices
that have historically declined over relatively short time
periods and we are currently in a period of very significant
price declines. If we are unable to effectively manage our
inventories and channel inventories, reduce our costs, introduce
new products with higher average selling prices or increase our
sales volumes, our revenues and gross margins will be negatively
impacted.
Our competitors and customers impose significant pricing
pressures on us. In the first quarter of 2006, our
competitors’ prices have declined dramatically. Our prices
have fallen faster than our costs, particularly the cost of
flash memory, which has resulted in additional margin pressure.
In addition, because a large percentage of our sales are to a
small number of customers that are primarily retail consumer
chains, distributors and large OEMs, these customers have
exerted, and we expect they will continue to exert, pressure on
us to make price concessions or to match pricing of our
competitors. In the past, we have significantly reduced the
prices of many of our flash products from time to time. We
reduced prices again in the first quarter of 2006, and we expect
we will need to continue to do so to remain competitive. Any
reduction in prices by us in response to pricing pressures will
hurt our gross margins unless we can reduce our costs and manage
our internal and channel inventories to minimize the impact of
such price declines.
If we are unable to reduce our costs to offset declines in
average selling prices or increase the sales volume of our
existing products, particularly higher capacity or premium
products, our revenues and gross
margins will be adversely affected. This may negatively impact
our anticipated growth in product revenues as well as our gross
margins, particularly if the decline in our average selling
prices is not matched by price declines in our component costs,
primarily the cost of flash memory. Furthermore, even if we
experience price declines in our component costs, such price
reductions could result in reduced margins when we sell products
that include components in inventory which were previously
purchased at a higher price.
Because we protect many of our retail customers and
distributors against the effects of price decreases on their
inventories of our products, we have in the past and may in the
future incur large price protection charges if we reduce our
prices when there are large quantities of our products in our
distribution channel.
Nearly all of our retail product sales in 2003, 2004, and 2005
were made through our resellers to which we have provided price
protection. Price protection allows customers to receive a price
adjustment on existing inventory when its published price is
reduced. In an environment of slower demand and abundant supply
of products, price declines and channel promotions expenses are
more likely to occur and, should they occur, are more likely to
have a significant impact on our operating results. Further, in
this environment, high channel inventory may result in
substantial price protection charges. These price protection
charges have the effect of reducing gross sales and gross
margin. Price protection in our retail channel was approximately
$13.3 million, or 3.4% of product revenues, during 2003;
approximately $52.6 million, or 7.8% of product revenues,
during 2004; and, approximately $19.3 million, or 2.3% of
product revenues, during 2005. In the first quarter of 2006, we
have had to reduce our prices significantly in response to
competitive pressures. We anticipate that we will continue to
incur price protection charges for the foreseeable future due to
competitive pricing pressures and, as a result, our revenues and
gross margins will be adversely affected.
We have written down and may need to further write-down
our inventory if our sales levels do not match our expectations
or if selling prices decline more than we anticipate, which
could adversely impact our revenues and gross margins.
We operate in an industry that is characterized by intense
competition, supply shortages or oversupply, rapid technological
change, evolving industry standards, declining average selling
prices and rapid product obsolescence, all of which make it more
challenging to effectively manage our inventory. Our inventories
are stated at the lower of cost or market value. Determining
market value of inventories involves numerous judgments,
including judgments regarding average selling prices and sales
volumes for future periods. We primarily utilize estimated
selling prices for measuring any potential declines in market
value below cost. When market value is determined to be below
cost, we make appropriate allowances to reduce the value of
inventories to net realizable value. This may occur where we
determine that inventories are slow moving, obsolete or excess
or where the selling price of the product is insufficient to
cover product costs and selling expenses.
We have a significant amount of inventory related to our
packaging and labels. We had previously announced our
introduction of a new branding campaign. As we transitioned to
new packaging related to our new branding initiatives, we had
excess inventory related to earlier brand designs. We are also
in the process of shifting and have shifted to other suppliers
to meet our packaging needs. Certain of our suppliers purchase
components on our behalf. As we shifted to new suppliers, we had
additional write downs associated with inventory that was
slow-moving, obsolete or excess or could not be transferred to
our new suppliers. Cost of product revenues in 2003, 2004 and
2005 include the write-down of inventories totaling
$4.1 million, $17.4 million and $31.0 million,
respectively. If actual product demand or selling prices are
less favorable than we estimate, we may be required to take
additional inventory write-downs and our revenues and gross
margins will be negatively impacted.
As part of our write-down of inventory in 2005, we took into
account adverse purchase commitments along with inventory held
at our contract manufacturers and fulfillment houses where
purchases were made on our behalf based on forecasts. We
reserved approximately $2.6 million for this inventory in
the fourth quarter since usage of these supplies has not
occurred or are not contemplated to occur within a reasonable
time.
Our operating results and gross margins have fluctuated in
the past, may fluctuate significantly in the future and are
difficult to predict. If our future results are below the
financial guidance provided by us or the expectations of
investors or securities analysts, the market price of our common
stock could decline significantly.
Our operating results and gross margins have fluctuated in the
past and may vary significantly in the future based on a number
of factors related to our industry and the markets for our
products. We will have little or no control over many of these
factors and any of these factors could cause our operating
results and gross margins, and consequently the price of our
common stock, to fluctuate significantly. These factors include,
among others:
•
competitive pricing pressures for the products we sell,
including the timing and amount of any reductions in the average
selling prices of our products and services;
•
the failure of cost decreases to keep up with price decreases
for our products;
•
the timing and amount of expenses related to obsolescence and
disposal of excess inventory and the difficulty of forecasting
and managing our inventory levels, including inventories on
consignment and at contract manufacturers;
•
the amount of price protection, volume incentive rebates,
discounts, market development funds, cooperative advertising
payments and other concessions and discounts that we may need to
provide to some of our customers due to competitive pricing
pressures;
•
the mix of business between retail, OEM and licensing;
•
whether we can sell controllers, digital media accessories and
other components in the volumes and at the prices we anticipate;
•
fluctuation in demand for our products, including seasonal
demand for our products and the volume and timing of potential
retail customer and distributor orders;
•
the timely availability of flash memory, particularly flash
memory that meets our technological requirements and the
availability to us of lower cost multi-level cell, or MLC, flash
memory;
•
the decision of our customers to return products or rotate their
stock;
•
the inability of suppliers to fully indemnify us should we be
subjected to litigation;
•
the availability of sufficient silicon wafer foundry capacity
and product components to meet customer demand;
•
the difficulty of forecasting sell-through rates of our products
and their impact on inventory levels at our resellers if
sell-through data is not timely reported to us, which may result
in additional orders being delayed or reduced and inventory
being returned;
•
price reductions in key components, such as flash memory, which
could result in reduced margins when selling products that
include previously purchased components held in inventory;
•
increases in costs charged by our component or card suppliers or
the failure of our suppliers to decrease the prices they charge
to us when industry prices decline;
•
the timing and amount of orders or cancellations from existing
and new customers and penalties imposed by customers for failure
to meet their requirements;
•
the commencement of, involvement in or the expansion, appeal or
settlement of our litigation;
•
any changes in the trend of declining average selling prices per
unit sold of digital storage media;
•
competing flash card standards, which displace the standards
used in our products and our customers’ products;
shortages of components such as capacitors and printed circuit
boards required for the manufacturing of our products;
•
exchange rate fluctuations, particularly the U.S. dollar to
British pound and Japanese yen and the British pound to Euro
exchange rates;
•
the announcement or introduction of products and technologies by
competitors; and
•
potential product quality problems which could raise return or
rework costs.
In addition, as a result of the emerging nature of our market,
we may be unable to accurately forecast our revenues and gross
margins. We incur expenses based predominantly on operating
plans and estimates of future revenues. Our expenses are to a
large extent fixed in the short term and we may not be able to
adjust them quickly to meet a shortfall in revenues during any
particular quarter. We also plan inventory levels based on
anticipated demand for our products and on anticipated product
mix. As we anticipate increased demand for certain products we
increase our level of inventory, which results in increased risk
if we inaccurately estimate anticipated demand. Also, because of
irregular component shipments from certain of our suppliers, we
have had to carry a higher level of inventory as a buffer
against delivery delays. Any significant shortfall in revenues
in relation to our expenses and planned inventories would
decrease our net income or increase our operating losses and
harm our financial condition. Declines in our operating results
or gross margins may cause us to fail to meet the expectations
of investors or securities analysts, which would be likely to
cause the market price of our common stock to decline.
An unfavorable outcome or delays with respect to our
ongoing litigation could lead to a decline in our stock price
and have a negative impact on our ability to increase our
licensing revenues.
In March 2005, a jury found Toshiba Corporation and Toshiba
America Electronic Components, Inc. liable to us for breach of
fiduciary duty and theft of trade secrets and awarded us over
$465 million in damages, including a punitive damage award
for conduct by Toshiba that the jury found to be oppressive,
fraudulent or malicious.
On December 2, 2005, the Court issued an order granting
defendants’ motion for a new trial on the economic and
monetary awards for misappropriation of trade secrets and breach
of fiduciary duty. The Court denied defendants’ motion for
a new trial on all other grounds and also denied the motion for
judgment notwithstanding the verdict. The effect of the
Court’s order is that the jury’s damage award of
approximately $465 million has been set aside and interest
will not accrue on this amount.
Both defendants and we have appealed the Court’s
December 2, 2005 order. Defendants have appealed from those
portions of the order that denies them a new trial on liability
and denies their motion for judgment notwithstanding the
verdict. We have appealed from that portion of the order that
grants defendants a new trial on damages. Defendants have also
protectively cross-appealed from the judgment, meaning that
should the order granting a new trial on damages be set aside,
the Court of Appeals would need to address aspects of the
judgment that defendants challenge in that context. In all
events, because of the parties’ cross appeals from the new
trial order, the Court of Appeals will address both damages and
liability issues presented by the jury’s verdict.
If the briefing goes as expected, we expect that the Court of
Appeals will hold argument on the appeals in the third or fourth
quarter of 2007. There are a number of possible dispositions of
the appeal, including an
across-the-board
affirmance of the order granting a new damages trial and denying
defendants’ motion for judgment notwithstanding the
verdict. If this occurs, and if the Supreme Court does not grant
review of the Court of Appeal’s decision, the new damages
trial would likely take place in the Santa Clara County
Superior Court in 2008. If the Supreme Court granted review,
however, the appellate proceedings would likely not conclude
until 2010, with a new damages trial possible thereafter.
During the time the case remains pending, we expect to incur
substantial additional legal costs. The Court of Appeals could
also award the payment of costs to the prevailing party on
appeal which could be in the millions of dollars. If Toshiba
prevailed on appeal or if the appeal were delayed, this could
adversely affect our
ability to secure additional licensing revenue either from
Toshiba or other potential licensees and, have a negative impact
on the value of our stock.
We have changed our pricing strategy to aggressively match
our competitors’ product price declines, which could result
in reductions to our revenues, gross margins and market
share.
In the first quarter of 2005, we announced that we would focus
our business on profitability, potentially at the expense of
revenue growth and market share. However, in the first quarter
of 2006, our competitors made very significant across the board
price decreases affecting substantially all of our products. In
response to these competitive pricing pressures in the first
quarter of 2006, we have had to adjust our strategy and we have
significantly lowered our prices to remain competitive in the
market place. We may be required to make further price
reductions in response to competitive pricing pressures. We
intend to continue to manage our selling prices with the
intention of focusing on profitability as much as possible while
balancing our goal to maintain our retail market position. If we
cannot offset such lower prices with lower costs through our
suppliers, it will have a negative impact on our gross margins.
If the retail selling prices of our products are not competitive
with our competitors’ selling prices, our resellers may
further reduce their orders, purchase from other vendors or
return unsold product to us within the scope of their agreements.
We expect that our controller and other component sales
will decline in the first quarter of 2006 and beyond which will
cause our revenues, gross margins and results of operations to
be negatively impacted.
In 2005, our revenues from our OEM channel increased to
$196.7 million. Our OEM channel sales consist primarily of
kits consisting of our controller with other components, such as
flash memory, as well as our controllers sold as a stand-alone
product and to original equipment manufacturers and companies
that target the flash card market. Our components business grew
rapidly in 2005 because of the general industry shortage in
flash memory. Our component customers include OEMs and companies
that serve retail card markets. This business is opportunistic
and generally depends on tight flash supply. We currently expect
our controller and other component revenues to significantly
decrease in the first quarter of 2006 and beyond. As our sales
of these components decline, or if we cannot successfully sell
such products according to our current plans or maintain the
rights to do so, our revenues and results of operations would be
negatively impacted. Our sales of other components also had a
positive impact on our days sales outstanding which will be
negatively impacted as such sales decrease.
If we are unable to continue to develop, competitively
market and successfully sell our JumpDrive portable flash
storage product line, our revenues, gross margins and results of
operations will be negatively impacted.
We derive a significant portion of our revenues and gross margin
from sales of our JumpDrive flash storage products. The market
for USB drives has become increasingly competitive. We believe
that design has become an important selling feature for these
products unlike other flash cards which have fixed dimensions
and specifications. If we cannot continue to develop, market and
sell these products, particularly with designs that appeal to a
broad group of customers, and successfully educate consumers
regarding the products’ selling features in order to gain
commercial acceptance and premium pricing, our revenues, gross
margins and operating results may suffer.
We depend on a few key customers and the loss of any of
them could significantly reduce our revenues.
Historically, a small number of our customers have accounted for
a significant portion of our revenues. During 2005, sales to the
ten customers from which we received the greatest revenues
accounted for approximately 47.9% of our gross revenues while
sales to one customer, Wal-Mart (including Sam’s Club),
represented 19.6% of our gross revenues. In 2005, we lost
product placements to our competitors at certain retailers and
other retail accounts due to competitive pricing pressures and
our focus on profitability, and we expect that if we do not
maintain competitive pricing, such accounts will continue to be
a smaller portion of our business in 2006 and for the
foreseeable future.
Our revenues could decline if one or more of our largest
customers were to:
•
significantly reduce, delay or cancel their orders;
•
decide to purchase digital media manufactured by one of our
competitors;
•
terminate their relationship with us;
•
develop and manufacture their own digital media; or
•
cease operations due to a downturn in the global economy.
In addition, we do not carry credit insurance on our accounts
receivables and any difficulty in collecting outstanding amounts
due from our customers, particularly customers that place larger
orders or experience financial difficulties, could adversely
affect our revenues and our net income. Because our sales are
made by means of standard purchase orders rather than long-term
contracts, we cannot assure you that these customers will
continue to purchase quantities of our products at current
levels, or at all.
We expect our operating results for at least the next several
years to continue to depend on sales to a relatively small
number of customers.
A lack of effective internal control over financial
reporting could result in an inability to accurately report our
financial results that could lead to a loss of investor
confidence in our financial reports and have an adverse effect
on our stock price.
Effective internal control over financial reporting is essential
for us to produce reliable financial reports. If we cannot
provide reliable financial information or prevent fraud, our
business and operating results could be harmed. We have in the
past discovered, and may in the future discover, deficiencies in
our internal control over financial reporting. In connection
with our management’s evaluation of our internal control
over financial reporting as of December 31, 2005,
management identified two control deficiencies that constitute
material weaknesses. As more fully described in Item 9A of
this report, as of December 31, 2005, our management
determined that we did not maintain effective internal control
over:
•
revenue recognition; and
•
the accounting for inventory.
As a result of the material weaknesses identified, we concluded
that our internal control over financial reporting was not
effective as of December 31, 2005, and
PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP, our independent registered public
accounting firm, issued an adverse opinion on the effectiveness
of our internal control over financial reporting as of
December 31, 2005. Although we have continued to take
certain steps to remediate the material weaknesses identified in
our internal control over financial reporting, these measures
have not been entirely successful, and we continue to record
post-closing adjustments with respect to revenue recognition,
accounting for inventory and inventory valuation reserves and
related accruals. We are working to identify additional controls
and procedures, and we will need to test the effectiveness of
these ongoing actions. A failure to successfully implement and
maintain effective internal control over financial reporting,
including any ineffectiveness of the corrective actions we
implement to address the control deficiencies, could result in a
material misstatement of our financial statements or otherwise
cause us to fail to meet our financial reporting obligations.
This, in turn, could result in a loss of investor confidence in
the accuracy and completeness of our financial reports, which
could have an adverse effect on our stock price.
Our strategic partnership with Kodak and our ongoing
relationships with OEM customers pose significant challenges for
us, and if we are unable to manage these relationships, our
business and operating results will be adversely
affected.
We have entered into an exclusive multi-year agreement with
Kodak under which we will manufacture and distribute a full
range of KODAK branded memory cards. The management of the Kodak
business could adversely affect our revenues and gross margins
if we are, among other things, unable to:
•
properly manage the distribution and use of the KODAK brand;
•
control the sales and marketing expenses associated with
launching the brand in new channels;
•
plan for anticipated changes in demand;
•
effectively leverage the KODAK brand to achieve premium pricing
and grow market share;
•
maintain the market share position of the Lexar brand; and
•
appropriately allocate resources to support a dual branding
strategy.
In the future, a meaningful portion of our revenue may be
derived from sales of digital media under the Kodak brand. We
have a number of obligations that we must fulfill under our
agreement with Kodak to keep the license exclusive and to keep
it in effect. These obligations include compliance with Kodak
guidelines and trademark usage, customer satisfaction, and the
requirement that we meet market share goals and target minimum
royalty payments. As of December 31, 2005, we had not met
these targets. As a result, Kodak may in the future have the
right to make our license non-exclusive or to terminate our
license in its entirety. If we were to lose the rights to sell
products under the Kodak brand, our financial results could be
significantly negatively impacted.
In addition, our business may also be negatively impacted if we
are unable to manage our existing relationships with our OEM
customers. Our OEM customers include many large domestic and
international companies that have greater financial resources
and bargaining power than we do. As a result, our agreements
with some of these customers include restrictions and
commitments that could adversely affect our revenues and gross
margins. These contractual provisions include, among others:
•
guaranteed pricing and price protection;
•
commitments to supply product at the customer’s requested
volumes;
•
penalties for late shipment, delivery cancellation or failure to
meet certain quality assurances;
•
agreements not to sue, or assert our intellectual property
rights against, such customers; and
•
limitations on our ability to terminate such agreements.
We are substantially leveraged, which could adversely
affect our ability to adjust our business, to develop or enhance
our products, expand our operations, respond to competitive
pressures or obtain additional financing.
We have significant indebtedness. In March and May 2005, we
issued $70.0 million in aggregate principal amount of
5.625% senior convertible notes due April 1, 2010. In
addition, as of December 31, 2005, we had borrowed
$54.7 million under the Wells Fargo Foothill asset-based
credit facility, which has since been repaid.
The degree to which we are leveraged could have important
consequences, including, but not limited to, the following:
•
our ability to obtain additional financing in the future for
working capital, capital expenditures, acquisitions, general
corporate or other purposes may be limited;
•
a substantial portion of our cash flow from operations will be
dedicated to the payment of the principal and interest on our
indebtedness;
if we elect to pay any premium on the senior convertible notes
with shares of our common stock or we are required to pay a
“make-whole” premium with our shares of common stock,
our existing stockholders’ interest in us would be
diluted; and
•
we may be more vulnerable to economic downturns, less able to
withstand competitive pressures and less flexible in responding
to changing business and economic conditions.
Our ability to pay interest and principal on our asset-based
credit facility and debt securities, to satisfy other debt
obligations which may arise and to make planned expenditures
will be dependent on our future operating performance, which
could be affected by changes in economic conditions and other
factors, some of which are beyond our control. A failure to
comply with the covenants and other provisions of our debt
instruments could result in events of default under such
instruments, which could permit acceleration of the debt under
such instruments and in some cases acceleration of debt under
other instruments that may contain cross-default or
cross-acceleration provisions. At December 31, 2005, we
were in technical default of one of the reporting covenants
under the Wells Fargo Foothill facility. Although we have
obtained from the bank a waiver of our compliance with this
covenant and any corresponding event of default, there is no
assurance that the bank will provide a waiver in the event of
any future non-compliance. If we are at any time unable to
generate sufficient cash flow from operations to service our
indebtedness, we may be required to attempt to renegotiate the
terms of the instruments relating to the indebtedness, seek to
refinance all or a portion of the indebtedness or obtain
additional financing. There can be no assurance that we will be
able to successfully renegotiate such terms, that any such
refinancing would be possible or that any additional financing
could be obtained on terms that are favorable or acceptable to
us.
If we cannot raise needed funds on acceptable terms, or at all,
we may not be able to maintain our product development schedule,
respond to competitive pressures or grow our business. Failure
to obtain additional funds when required could also result in
inadequate capital to operate our business in accordance with
our plans and require us to cut back operations, which could
result in a further decline in revenues, or to cease our
operations. If we need to raise additional funds during the next
twelve months to fund potential growth or our operations, it
could be difficult to obtain additional financing on favorable
terms, or at all. We may try to obtain additional financing by
issuing shares of common stock, preferred stock, convertible
debt securities, or warrants or otherwise, which could dilute
our existing stockholders.
We primarily depend upon Samsung for our flash memory. If
Samsung is unable to provide us with sufficient quantities of
flash memory when we need it at prices and sales terms that
allow us to be competitive in the marketplace, if Samsung is
unable to remain technologically competitive, or if Samsung were
to reduce or eliminate our credit terms, we would not be able to
manufacture and deliver digital media to our customers in
accordance with their volume, price and schedule requirements,
which would have a serious negative impact on our revenues and
margins.
As a result of the supply agreement we entered into with Samsung
in 2001, Samsung is our primary supplier of flash memory, which
is the primary cost of our digital media. During 2005, the
demand for flash memory was greater than the supply of flash
memory due to the continuing demand for digital consumer
products, such as cellular phones, digital cameras and MP3
players, and accompanying digital media products. We expect that
flash will again become in tight supply in the second half of
2006. If we are unable to obtain sufficient quantities of flash
memory from Samsung or from another flash memory supplier in a
timely manner and at competitive prices, we will not be able to
manufacture and deliver flash memory products to satisfy our
customers’ requirements.
We typically need to build a strategic inventory of key
components, including flash, in advance of our customers’
needs. If we do not forecast accurately, we may not have enough
flash to build cards to meet our customers’ needs or we may
have too much inventory or inventory of the wrong type.
Although a number of semiconductor companies have begun to
manufacture flash memory that would meet some of our needs, we
expect Samsung and Toshiba will continue to dominate the market
for high density flash chips as the new flash memory suppliers
are generally beginning their production with lower density
products and are not expected to bring significant supply of
larger capacity flash to market over the
period. The new flash suppliers have been delayed in their
efforts to enter the flash chip market and their technical
roadmaps may now be substantially behind the products
manufactured and sold by Samsung and Toshiba. Even as additional
flash memory capacity becomes available from new suppliers,
these suppliers may not be able to supply our flash memory needs
at competitive prices if we cannot obtain adequate supplies from
Samsung. Even if we are able to obtain flash memory in
sufficient volumes and on schedules that permit us to satisfy
our delivery requirements, the prices charged by Samsung or
other suppliers have not and may not enable us to compete
effectively in our market. If we are unable to satisfy the
requirements of our customers or supply digital media to them in
the volumes and at the pricing they request, they will likely
reduce future orders, impose penalties on us for failure to meet
their requirements or eliminate us as a supplier. Our reputation
would likely also be harmed and we may not be able to replace
any lost business with new customers. If we are unable to obtain
flash memory at economical prices, our gross margins would
decline unless we could raise the prices of our products in a
commensurate manner or offset the cost increases elsewhere. The
existing competitive conditions in our industry may not permit
us to do so, which would adversely impact our revenues and gross
margins.
In addition, if Samsung does not offer us prices, sales terms
and credit terms that are appropriate to meet our growing needs,
we might have to seek alternate suppliers or additional
financing. If Samsung does not follow through on its agreements
with us with respect to allocation of flash supply, flash
packaging types that it would provide, pricing and other rights,
our revenue and margins would be adversely affected. Samsung may
not be able to offer us flash memory in the type of packaging or
technical specifications that we need which would leave us
unable to manufacture certain card formats. Additionally,
Samsung and other current and potential suppliers of flash
memory are located in Asia, a region that has been, and in the
future may be, affected by economic and political instability
that could adversely affect the price and supply of flash
memory. Furthermore, if Samsung is unable to increase its output
of flash memory in a manner commensurate with our needs, or to
manufacture flash memory that is technologically and price
competitive, or if it has any interruptions in shipment for any
reason, we would be unable to satisfy our customers’
requirements. For example, Samsung has previously emphasized
smaller flash geometries over multi-level cell technology. In
contrast, Toshiba and SanDisk are manufacturing multi-level cell
technology in volume at high yields, which appears to give them
significant cost advantages over single-level cell technologies.
Samsung has from time to time considered directly entering the
retail market for flash media, which would make it a direct
competitor to us. Because flash memory represents a significant
portion of the cost of flash media, flash manufacturers like
Samsung may have a competitive advantage.
In October 2005, we agreed to extend our supply agreement with
Samsung until March 2011, unless the agreement is earlier
terminated as a result of a party’s breach of the agreement
or bankruptcy. If our supply agreement with Samsung were to
terminate and we were unable to secure a sufficient volume of
flash memory from other suppliers at competitive pricing, our
ability to deliver flash memory products to satisfy our
customers’ requirements would be negatively impacted.
In 2005, we modified our pricing strategy and
significantly reduced our promotional programs. Additionally, in
the first quarter of 2005, we increased prices on certain
products to most of our customers to better align our selling
prices with our cost structure. Many of our retail customers and
distributors have rights of return, and if they decide to
terminate their relationships with us and purchase from other
vendors as a result of those actions, similar future actions or
otherwise, we may be required to take back large quantities of
unsold customer inventory which could have an adverse effect on
our revenues.
Substantially all of our sales of our digital media products to
end-users are made through distributors and retailers. Our sales
through these channels often include rights to return unsold
customer inventory still in the customers’ inventory for
credit. In 2005, we modified our pricing strategy and
significantly reduced our promotional programs. Additionally, in
the first quarter of 2005, we increased prices on certain
products to most of our customers to better align our selling
prices with our cost structure, and many of our products remain
priced at a premium in relation to certain of our competitors.
If our products do not sell through to the end customer, our
resellers or their customers may decide to reduce their orders,
purchase from other vendors
or return unsold product to us. In the past several quarters, we
have lost product placements to our competitors at Wal-Mart
(including Sam’s Club), CompUSA, Best Buy, Circuit City and
other resellers in part because of our pricing strategy and
competitive pricing pressures. In addition, at Wal-Mart
(including Sam’s Club), which accounted for 19.6% of our
gross revenue in 2005, we have experienced a significant decline
in sales due to the addition of other vendors.
If our resellers reduce or cancel their orders, they may also
decide to exercise their rights of return and require that we
take back large quantities of unsold customer inventory. As a
result of the product placements we have recently lost to our
competitors at certain resellers, we have experienced an
increase in product returns. Our customers generally place
orders on the expectation of certain promotional support from
us, and if we do not increase our promotional activities, those
customers may decide to return significant amounts of products
to us. Furthermore, if there are significant inventories of old
products in our distribution channel when a new product is
released, or if these distributors and retailers are
unsuccessful in selling our products, there could be substantial
product returns. If our reserves are insufficient to account for
these or future returns or if we are unable to resell these
products on a timely basis at similar prices, our revenues may
be reduced. Because the market for our products is rapidly
evolving, we may not be able to resell returned products at
attractive prices or at all.
We depend on single suppliers for certain key components
and products. We do not have long-term supply contracts with
many of these suppliers and we are therefore exposed to certain
risks, including price increases, late deliveries, poor
component quality and a potential inability to obtain an
adequate supply of components. In addition, there is a risk that
we will have inadequate or incomplete indemnification from these
suppliers, so we also face the risk that our margins and
operating results would be severely negatively impacted if such
components or products infringe the intellectual property rights
of a third party or if we are found to owe license fees or
royalties relating to these products.
We have a sole source of supply for certain key components in
our digital media. Because we depend on single suppliers for
certain key components, and do not have a long-term supply
contract with many of these suppliers, we face the risk of
inadequate component supply, price increases, late deliveries
and poor component quality. Any supplier may terminate their
relationships with us or pursue other relationships with our
competitors, and if we were to lose our relationship with these
single suppliers, the lead time required to qualify new
suppliers could be significant. Also, if we lose our single
suppliers or these suppliers are otherwise unable to satisfy our
volume and delivery schedule requirements, it may be difficult
to locate any suppliers who have the ability to develop,
manufacture and deliver the specialized components we need for
our products. If we are unable to accurately predict our supply
needs, or if our supply of components is disrupted, we may incur
significant inventory write downs, and we may lose customers,
incur penalties from our customers or be unable to attract new
customers.
Furthermore, not all of our suppliers provide us with
indemnification regarding our purchases. Other suppliers impose
limits on their indemnification obligations. If such components
or products infringe the intellectual property rights of a third
party either alone or in combination or if we are found to owe
license fees or royalties relating to these components or
products, our margins and operating results would be severely
negatively impacted.
We also do not currently manufacture certain digital media
formats, such as the Secure Digital Card formats as well as
certain of our JumpDrive products, with our own controllers. We
also do not manufacture our xD cards. We do not have long-term
supply contracts with all of these suppliers, and therefore face
the risks of inadequate supply, price increases, late delivery
or unavailability and the need to maintain buffer inventory. If
our supply of such products is disrupted, we will lose existing
customers and may be unable to replace them or to attract new
ones.
If we are unable to generate increased revenue from
licensing our intellectual property, our gross margins and
results of operations would be negatively impacted.
We have historically derived the substantial majority of our
licensing revenue from a limited number of sources. If we fail
to generate significant licensing revenues or increase the
revenues we derive from our higher margin controller sales, we
may not grow our revenues and margins. In March 2002, we
executed a license agreement with Samsung that provided for
fixed license payments through March 31, 2004 and variable
based royalties thereafter. In October 2005, we entered into a
license and strategic alliance agreement with Samsung that
modified and extended our original agreements. As a result, we
received significant non-recurring license payments during the
fourth quarter of 2005 and the first quarter of 2006. The
payments received under this agreement are being recognized over
a three year period beginning in November 2005. We cannot assure
you that we will be successful in our efforts to secure new
license or royalty revenues from Samsung or others, and our
failure to do so could negatively impact our operating results.
We need to improve our operations infrastructure and our
supply chain.
We currently intend to implement significant changes in our
supply chain. These changes include establishing a new
operational hub in Asia, requiring more of our suppliers to sell
us components on consignment, and changing our current
distribution arrangements. If these changes are not implemented
smoothly, we would be at risk of severe product interruptions
which would negatively impact our revenues and our relationships
with our customers.
If our component suppliers are not able to meet our demand in a
timely manner, we may not be able to manufacture and package
products quickly enough to meet customer demand. If this were to
occur, customers would likely cancel orders or switch suppliers.
In addition, if we are unable to manufacture products at rates
sufficient to keep up with our component purchases, we may have
too much inventory that would later need to be written down if
component prices decrease. This challenge is exacerbated by the
fact that our contract manufacturers and fulfillment houses
place orders for materials and components on our behalf
according to our forecasts. Because of the seasonality in our
business, inventory planning becomes particularly important. If
we are not able to manage our component purchases and inventory
appropriately, our financial results will be negatively impacted.
In addition, we must continue to make significant investments in
our existing internal information management systems to support
increased manufacturing, as well as accounting and other
management related functions. Our systems, procedures and
controls may not be adequate to support rapid growth, and as
described in further detail in Item 9A of this report, as
of December 31, 2005, we identified two deficiencies in our
internal control over financial reporting that were determined
to be material weaknesses. We cannot assure you that we will not
have internal control deficiencies in the future, including
deficiencies that may be deemed to be material weaknesses, which
could in turn harm our business, financial condition and results
of operations. In addition, any improvement in economic
conditions will likely extend the lead-time for procuring
components. If we do not plan properly or if the demand rises
too quickly, we will face material shortages.
The solid-state storage market is evolving and we may not
have rights to manufacture and sell certain types of flash card
formats or we may be forced to pay a royalty to sell digital
media in these formats. Future digital media formats may not use
our core technology.
Many digital cameras and other consumer devices use digital
media formats such as the SD Card, MicroSD or xD Picture Card
formats, which we do not have the rights to manufacture. Our
cost structure on these products is higher than our cost
structure for other products. The Secure Digital Card was
introduced by a consortium consisting of SanDisk, Matsushita and
Toshiba. The consortium charges significant license fees to
other companies that want to manufacture SD Cards. The Secure
Digital Card and the xD Picture Card have continued to rapidly
gain broad consumer acceptance. This has resulted, and will
likely continue to result in, a decline in demand, on a relative
basis, for products that we have the rights to manufacture
without the payment of a royalty. Also, SanDisk and M-Systems
have created a new organization called U3 which purports to set
standards for features relating to USB flash drives. If U3 based
USB flash drives were to be
widely accepted and we were required to pay a royalty to
manufacture such products, it would have a negative impact on
our margins.
We believe that one of our advantages is our ability to offer
retailers all major flash card formats, and, if we were unable
to supply all flash card formats at competitive prices or if we
were to have product shortages, our margins would be adversely
impacted and our customers would likely cancel orders or seek
other suppliers to replace us.
We market our digital media primarily on the basis of its
superior technology. If we are unable to achieve or maintain
technological leadership or gain commercial acceptance of the
performance and technology advantages of our products, our
revenues and gross margins would likely decline
significantly.
We market our digital media primarily on the basis of its
performance and technology advantage over our competitors’
products. In doing so, we have emphasized our speed and other
advantages over our competitors’ products and have tried to
establish ourselves as the brand of choice among professional
photographers. From time to time our competitors have introduced
products for which they have claimed large storage capacities,
high, sustained write speeds, including write speeds faster than
that of some of our own competing products, and similar
functionality to that of our own products. If we are unable to
design and manufacture products that are technologically
superior to those of our competitors, if we lose our status as a
brand preferred by professional photographers or if we are
unable to gain commercial acceptance of the performance and
technology advantages of our products, we will be unable to
achieve a premium price for our products. If this were to occur,
our revenues and gross margins would likely decline
significantly.
Increased competition in the digital media market may lead
to a decrease in our revenues and market share.
Our industry is characterized by intense competition, supply
shortages or oversupply, rapid technological change, evolving
industry standards, declining average selling prices and rapid
product obsolescence. Our existing competitors include many
large domestic and international companies that have longer
operating histories and have or may have greater brand name
recognition, greater access to flash memory, substantially
greater financial, technical, marketing and other resources,
broader product lines and longer standing relationships with
retailers, OEMs and end users. As a result, these competitors
may be able to better absorb price declines, ensure more stable
supply, adapt more quickly to new or emerging technologies or
devote greater resources to the promotion and sale of their
products than we may. Ultimately, this may lead to a decrease in
our sales and market share and have a material adverse effect on
our business, financial condition and results of operations.
We compete with semiconductor companies that manufacture and
sell flash memory chips or flash memory cards. These include
Hynix, Infineon, Micron, Renesas, Samsung, SanDisk, ST Micro and
Toshiba. Micron and Intel have recently formed a joint venture
known as IM Flash Technologies, LLC. SanDisk and Toshiba jointly
develop and manufacture both low-cost and high-performance flash
memory through their Flash Vision joint venture. Because flash
memory represents a significant portion of the cost of flash
media, SanDisk and other flash manufacturers may have a
competitive advantage and may have access to flash memory at
prices substantially below the prices that our suppliers charge
us. SanDisk has other competitive advantages in that it also
collects substantial royalties pursuant to license agreements
with Samsung and others. SanDisk also collects royalties on the
manufacture and sale of SD Cards. In conjunction with the
SanDisk/ Samsung license agreement, SanDisk has announced that
Samsung sells flash to SanDisk at very favorable pricing.
We also face significant competition from manufacturers or card
assemblers and resellers that either resell flash cards
purchased from others or assemble cards from controllers and
flash memory chips purchased from companies such as Renesas,
Samsung or Toshiba, into flash cards. These competitors include
Crucial Technology, a division of Micron, Dane-Elec, Delkin
Devices, Feiya, Fuji, Hagiwara, Hama, Hewlett Packard, Data I/
O, Infineon, Kingston, Kodak, M-Systems, Matsushita, Memorex,
Memory Plus, Micron,
In addition, an increasing number of companies are manufacturing
their own controllers, including Genesys, Hyperstone, Prolific,
SanDisk, Sigmatel, Silicon Storage Technology, SMI, Solid State
System, Sony and Zoran. Such companies either combine their
controllers with flash memory from third parties to manufacture
their own flash cards or sell their controllers to third parties
who use them to assemble flash cards. Additionally, major
semiconductor companies such as Infineon, Micron, Renesas,
Samsung and Toshiba have also developed or are currently
developing their own controllers that will likely compete with
our controller and/or card sales.
Furthermore, many companies have introduced USB flash drives
that compete directly with our JumpDrive line of products. These
include Apacer, Belkin, Fuji, Imation, Iomega, JMTek, KTI
Networks, Memorex, M-Systems, Netac, PNY, Samsung, SanDisk,
SimpleTech, Sony, Trek and many others.
Many of our competitors are larger than we are and, because they
manufacture their own controllers and/or flash memory, do not
depend to the extent we do on third parties to supply them with
those products. Flash memory has been in short supply for a
number of quarters which has resulted in our flash costs
decreasing at a slower rate than product pricing in the market.
Companies that manufacture their own flash memory will have a
significant advantage so long as this allocation situation
continues.
Our competitors have also introduced certain flash card formats.
For example, a consortium consisting of SanDisk, Matsushita and
Toshiba have developed the Secure Digital Card, a media format
used in digital cameras as well as in other electronic
applications, and Fuji and Olympus introduced the xD Picture
Card. Although we currently sell these flash memory products,
which we source from third parties, we must incur significant
royalties or higher costs to do so and may not be able to do so
in the future at a reasonable rate or at all. In addition,
SanDisk has introduced TransFlash, or MicroSD, which is designed
to be used in cell phone applications. If we are unable to
obtain the rights to manufacture these products, our business
will be adversely affected.
We also face competition from some manufacturers of traditional
film products. Kodak and Fuji are the largest and best-known
manufacturers of traditional film products. Fuji has entered the
flash card market, but does not yet manufacture its own flash
cards. In 2004, we entered into an agreement with Kodak to sell
flash cards under the Kodak brand on a worldwide basis. With
their resources and worldwide brand recognition, if we were to
lose the rights to sell products under that brand, Fuji and
Kodak would be formidable competitors for our core business.
Several companies, such as Cornice, IBM, and Matrix
Semiconductor, which was acquired by SanDisk in 2005, have
introduced competing technologies for use in digital cameras.
These include products such as Digital Capture Technology and
the MicroDrive. Although the cost per megabyte of rotating media
such as Digital Capture Technology and the MicroDrive is lower
than that of flash cards, rotating media has historically had
higher power consumption and lower reliability than flash cards.
Compact discs can also be used as a storage medium for digital
cameras and other devices, and, while inexpensive, are
relatively bulky. We expect to continue to face competition from
existing or future competitors that design and market similar or
alternative data storage solutions that may be less costly or
provide additional features. If a manufacturer of digital
cameras or other consumer electronic devices designs one of
these alternative competing standards into its products, the
digital media we manufacture, as currently configured, will not
be compatible with that product and our revenues may decline,
which would result in a material adverse effect on our business.
If we are unable to develop and introduce, on a timely
basis, new products or services that are accepted by our
customers and consumers, we will not be able to compete
effectively in our market.
We operate in an industry that is subject to evolving industry
standards, rapid technological changes, rapid changes in
consumer demands and the rapid introduction of new, higher
performance products that shorten product life cycles and tend
to decrease average selling prices. To remain competitive in
this demanding market, we must continually design, develop and
introduce new products and services that meet
the performance and price requirements of our customers and
consumers. For example, as the number of flash card formats
proliferates, it puts significant additional strain on our
engineering group to design controllers for each format. Any
significant delay or failure in releasing new products or
services would harm our reputation, provide a competitor a
first-to-market
opportunity or allow a competitor to achieve greater market
share. Also, we cannot assure you that any products or services
we do introduce will gain market acceptance. The introduction of
new products is inherently risky because it is difficult to
foresee advances in technology and the adoption of new
standards, to coordinate our technical personnel and strategic
relationships, to identify and eliminate design and product
flaws and successfully develop product features and designs that
will appeal to a wide range of consumers. We may not be able to
recoup research and development expenditures if our new products
or services are not widely accepted.
If we are unable to develop or maintain the strategic
relationships necessary to develop, sell and market products
that are commercially viable and widely accepted, the growth and
success of our business may be limited.
We may not be able to develop and sell products that are
commercially viable and widely accepted if we are unable to
anticipate market trends and the price, performance and
functionality requirements of digital camera and flash memory
manufacturers and customers. We must continue to collaborate
closely with our customers, digital camera manufacturers, flash
memory manufacturers and other suppliers to ensure that critical
development, marketing and distribution projects proceed in a
coordinated manner. This collaboration is also important because
our ability to anticipate trends and plan our development
activities depends to a significant degree upon our continued
access to information derived from strategic relationships we
currently have with digital camera and flash memory
manufacturers. This collaboration can be difficult because many
of these companies are located in Europe or Asia. If any of our
current relationships terminate or otherwise deteriorate, or if
we are unable to enter into future alliances that provide us
with comparable insight into market trends, we will be hindered
in our product development efforts.
We rely to a significant degree on retailers to sell our
digital media products and our inability to control the
activities of such retailers could cause our operating results
and gross margins to fluctuate significantly.
We sell a significant percentage of our digital media products
through retailers, most notably in 2005, Best Buy, Office Max,
Ritz Camera Centers, Target and Wal-Mart (including Sam’s
Club). Sales to retailers subject us to many special risks,
including the following:
•
continued downward pricing pressure in the retail channel has
necessitated, and we expect will continue to necessitate, price
protection of the inventories of our products that many of our
customers carry;
•
retailers may emphasize our competitors’ products over our
products or decline to carry our products or we may lose our
exclusive relationship with certain retailers;
•
loss of market share if the retailers that carry our products do
not grow as quickly and sell as many digital media products as
the retailers that carry the digital media products of our
competitors;
•
loss of business or monetary penalties if we are unable to
satisfy the product needs of these customers or fulfill their
orders on a timely basis;
•
increased sales and marketing expenses if we are unable to
accurately forecast our customer’s orders, including, among
other items, increased freight and fulfillment costs if faster
shipping methods are required to meet customer demand;
•
product returns could increase as a result of our strategic
interest in assisting retailers in balancing their inventories;
reduced gross margins, delays in collecting receivables and
increased inventory levels due to the increasing tendency for
some retailers to require products on a consignment basis.
Availability of reliable sell-through data varies throughout the
retail channel, which makes it difficult for us to determine
actual retail product revenues until after the end of each of
our fiscal quarters. Unreliable sell-through data may result in
either an overstatement or understatement of our reported
revenues and results of operations. Our arrangements with our
customers also provide them price protection against declines in
our recommended selling prices. Except in limited circumstances,
we do not have exclusive relationships with our retailers or
distributors and therefore must rely on them to effectively sell
our products over those of our competitors. Our reliance on the
activities of retailers over which we have little or no control
could cause our operating results and gross margins, and
consequently the price of our common stock, to fluctuate
significantly.
We depend primarily on United Microelectronics
Corporation, or UMC, and Silicon Motion, Inc., or SMI, to
manufacture our controllers, and if we are unable to obtain from
UMC or SMI sufficient quantities of controllers at acceptable
quality, yields and prices, and in a timely manner, we may not
be able to meet customer demand for our products, which could
limit the growth and success of our business.
We do not own or operate a semiconductor fabrication facility,
or fab. Instead, we rely primarily on two foundries, UMC and
SMI, to produce the majority of our controller products. Our
reliance on an independent foundry involves a number of
significant risks, including:
•
reduced control over delivery schedules, quality assurance,
manufacturing yields and production costs; and
•
unavailability of, or delayed access to, next-generation or key
process technologies.
We have entered into a supply agreement with UMC under which we
are obligated to provide UMC with a rolling forecast of our
anticipated purchase orders. Such forecasts may only be changed
by a certain percentage each month. This limits our ability to
react to significant fluctuations in demand for our products. If
UMC were to become unable or unwilling to continue manufacturing
our controllers in the required volumes, at acceptable quality,
yields and prices, and in a timely manner, we might not be able
to meet customer demand for our products, which could limit the
growth and success of our business. We have qualified other
fabs, but we cannot assure you that they will have sufficient
capacity to accommodate our demand at any particular time. Our
contract with UMC has been extended through December 31,2006. We have entered into a supply agreement with SMI, whereby
SMI supplies us with controllers for certain of our digital
media products. This agreement runs through September 2007 and
may be terminated by either party in the event of the other
party’s bankruptcy or breach of the agreement. We are
obligated to provide rolling forecasts to SMI and SMI has agreed
to maintain a buffer stock to meet our needs. SMI also provides
us with standard warranty and indemnity protections. If SMI were
unable or unwilling to supply us controllers in the required
volumes at acceptable quality and prices, we might not be able
to meet customer demand for our products, which could limit the
growth and success of our business. If SMI failed to meet its
warranty on indemnity obligations, our operating results could
be significantly and negatively impacted.
In addition, if competition for foundry capacity increases, we
may incur significant expenses to secure access to manufacturing
services, which in turn may cause our product costs to increase
substantially. We expect that the demand for capacity at these
facilities will change in the near future due to fluctuating
demand for consumer electronic and industrial products that
depend on semiconductors manufactured at these facilities. All
of these foundries are located in an area of the world that may
be subject to political and economic instability, the SARS
epidemic and natural disasters, particularly earthquakes. While
the last major earthquake in Taiwan did not have a significant
impact on deliveries to us from UMC, a similar event in the
future at one of their foundries could have a significant impact.
We depend solely on third-party subcontractors for
assembly and testing of our digital media products, which could
result in product shortages or delays or increase our costs of
manufacturing, assembling or testing our products.
Our flash cards are primarily assembled and tested by PC Partner
in China; Macrotron and Power Digital Card in Taiwan; Venture
Manufacturing Services in Singapore and Indonesia; and Venture
Manufacturing, Vitron, Macrotron and PC Partner in the United
States. We do not have a long-term agreement with Vitron,
Venture Manufacturing or PC Partner and typically obtain
services from them on a per order basis. Additionally, our
controllers are assembled, tested and packaged primarily by
Advanced Semiconductor Engineering in Taiwan and Advanced
Interconnection Technologies in Indonesia and in the United
States. Our reliance on these subcontractors involves risks such
as reduced control over delivery schedules, quality assurance,
inventory levels and costs. These risks could result in product
shortages or increase our costs of manufacturing, assembling or
testing our products. If these subcontractors are unable or
unwilling to continue to provide assembly and test services and
deliver products of acceptable quality, at acceptable costs and
in a timely manner, we would have to identify and qualify other
subcontractors. This could be time-consuming and difficult and
result in unforeseen operations problems.
If our efforts to optimize our supply chain are
unsuccessful and we are unable to meet our customers’
requirements, our business could be negatively impacted.
In order to improve our ability to operate within an
increasingly competitive environment, we are taking a variety of
measures designed to improve operational efficiency, including
streamlining our logistics to improve inventory management and
reducing manufacturing costs and operating expenses. One impact
of these changes will be that we will carry less inventory as a
buffer against irregular deliveries from our suppliers. If we
are unsuccessful in our efforts to improve operational
efficiency, or, if the third-party subcontractors and suppliers
on whom we depend fail to deliver or manufacture products in a
timely manner or are unable or unwilling to provide the products
and services we obtain from them at the cost and quality we
require, our supply of components may be adversely affected. If
this were to occur, we would not be able to deliver products to
our customers in a timely manner necessary to meet their
requirements. As a result, our business could be harmed, we may
lose customers, and we may be unable to achieve our goal of
sustaining profitability.
Our failure to successfully promote our brand and achieve
strong brand recognition in target markets could limit or reduce
the demand for our products and services.
We believe that brand recognition will be important to our
ability to succeed as the digital photography and the digital
media markets continue to develop. We plan to continue to invest
in marketing programs to create and maintain prominent brand
awareness. If we fail to promote our brand successfully, or if
the expenses associated with doing so become increasingly high,
our business may not grow as we anticipate. Other companies, who
may have significantly more resources to promote their own
brands than we do, may not be aggressively promoting their flash
card brands. If they begin to more aggressively promote their
brand or if our products exhibit poor performance or other
defects, our brand may be adversely affected, which would
inhibit our ability to attract or retain customers.
If we encounter difficulties in attracting and retaining
qualified personnel, particularly in light of the potential
merger with Micron and the resulting uncertainty, we may not be
able to successfully execute our business strategy, we may need
to grant large stock-based incentives that could be dilutive to
our stockholders and we may be required to pay significant
salaries which would increase our general and administrative
costs.
Our future success will depend to a significant extent on the
continued services of our key employees. Our success will also
depend on our ability to attract and retain qualified technical,
sales, marketing, finance and managerial personnel. If we are
unable to find, hire and retain qualified individuals, we may
have difficulty implementing portions of our business strategy
in a timely manner, or at all.
We may experience difficulty in hiring and retaining candidates
with appropriate qualifications particularly in light of the
potential merger with Micron and the resulting uncertainty. To
attract and retain qualified personnel, we may be required to
grant large option or other stock-based incentive awards, which
may be highly dilutive to existing stockholders and, as a result
of Statement of Financial Accounting Standards 123(R),
would require us to record compensation expense related to such
grants, which would result in lower reported earnings. We may
also be required to pay significant base salaries and cash
bonuses to attract and retain these individuals, which could
harm our operating results. If we do not succeed in hiring and
retaining candidates with appropriate qualifications, we will
not be able to grow our business.
If our products contain defects, we may incur unexpected
and significant operating expenses to correct the defects, we
may be required to pay damages to third parties and our
reputation may suffer serious harm.
Although the digital media products that we manufacture are
tested after they are assembled, these products are extremely
complex and may contain defects. These defects are particularly
likely when new versions or enhancements are released. The sale
of products with defects or reliability, quality or
compatibility problems may damage our reputation and our ability
to retain existing customers and attract new customers. For
example, if there are defects in our products that cause loss of
data, customers may lose their digital images stored on our
digital media. In addition, product defects and errors could
result in additional development costs, diversion of technical
and management resources, delayed product shipments, increased
product returns, product liability claims against us which may
not be fully covered by insurance or other operational
expenditures. For example, during the second quarter of 2005, in
collaboration with Canon, we identified a lost image condition
found to be rare and specific to select Canon cameras when used
with CompactFlash cards, including our own. To ensure
compatibility, we offered an update for our Professional 80x
CompactFlash cards and Canon offered a camera firmware update to
address issues experienced with other cards to customers who
experienced a problem with the identified Canon cameras. The
total estimated cost to rework these products is expected to be
approximately $0.9 million. Aggregate costs incurred to
rework the affected products through December 31, 2005 were
approximately $0.3 million. Finally, products we source
from others may have defects that we cannot quickly fix and that
will require us to return them to the manufacturer, which could
result in delayed product shipments and damage to our reputation.
Our significant sales outside the United States subject us
to increasing foreign political and economic risks, including
foreign currency fluctuations, and it may be difficult for us to
anticipate demand and pricing in those regions or effectively
manage the distributor channels and relationships in those
regions.
Total net revenues outside of the United States accounted for
approximately 42.8% of our total net revenues in 2005. We
generated a majority of our international revenues from product
sales in Europe and from product sales and licensing agreements
in Asia. The European and Asian markets are intensely
competitive. One of our principal growth strategies is to expand
our presence in this and other international markets both
through increased international sales and strategic
relationships. For example, we are expanding distribution of our
products into Latin America, China, India, Malaysia, Indonesia,
the Middle East, Russia and Eastern Europe. Consequently, we
anticipate that sales outside of the United States will continue
to account for a significant portion of our net revenues in
future periods. Accordingly, we are subject to international
risks, including:
•
foreign currency exchange fluctuations;
•
political and economic instability;
•
delays in meeting customer commitments due to difficulties
associated with managing an international distribution system;
•
increased time to collect receivables caused by slower payment
practices that are common in many international markets;
difficulties associated with managing export licenses, tariffs
and other regulatory issues pertaining to international trade;
•
increased effort and costs associated with the protection of our
intellectual property in foreign countries;
•
natural disasters, political uncertainties and changing
regulatory environments in foreign countries; and
•
difficulties in hiring and managing employees in foreign
countries.
In addition, if we are unable to accurately anticipate demand
and pricing of products in international markets, or if we
cannot work effectively with our distribution partners to create
demand, develop effective marketing programs, manage inventory
levels and collect receivables in a timely fashion, our
operating results will be harmed and our stock price will likely
decline. Increases in the value of the United States dollar
relative to foreign currencies could cause our products to
become less competitive in international markets and could
adversely affect our operating results. Although the sales of
our products are denominated primarily in United States dollars,
we also have product sales denominated in British pounds, Euros
and other European currencies, as well as the Japanese yen. To
the extent our prices are denominated in foreign currencies,
particularly the British pound, the Euro and Japanese yen, we
will be exposed to increased risks of currency fluctuations.
We have foreign subsidiaries in Australia, Great Britain, Japan,
Hong Kong, Shanghai and Singapore that operate and sell our
products in various global markets. As a result, we are exposed
to risks associated with changes in foreign currency exchange
rates for our sales as well as our costs denominated in those
currencies. We use forward contracts, to manage the exposures
associated with our net asset or liability positions. However,
we cannot assure you that any policies or techniques that we
have implemented will be successful or that our business and
financial condition will not be harmed by exchange rate
fluctuations.
If our suppliers or customers elect to compete with us in
the digital media market, our revenues and gross margins would
likely decline.
We sell our controllers to companies that use our controllers to
manufacture flash card products. Many of these customers are
large companies that have longer operating histories and greater
brand recognition, greater access to flash memory, substantially
greater financial, technical, marketing and other resources and
longer standing relationships with customers. If these companies
elected to compete directly with us in the digital media market
or in our retail channels, our revenues and gross margins would
likely decline.
Our financial results may be affected by mandated changes
in accounting and financial reporting.
We prepare our financial statements in conformity with
accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of
America. These principles are subject to interpretation by the
SEC and various bodies formed to interpret and create
appropriate accounting policies. A change in these policies can
have a significant effect on our reported results and may even
retroactively affect previously reported transactions.
In particular, changes to Financial Standards Accounting Board,
or FASB, guidelines relating to accounting for stock-based
compensation will increase our compensation expense, could make
our operating results less predictable in any given reporting
period and could change the way we compensate our employees or
cause other changes in the way we conduct our business. We
expect the adoption of the new pronouncement relating to
accounting for stock-based compensation will increase
compensation cost by approximately $5 million to
$7 million in 2006.
Our stock price and those of other technology companies
have experienced extreme price and volume fluctuations, and,
accordingly, our stock price may continue to be volatile.
The trading price of our common stock has fluctuated
significantly since our initial public offering in August 2000.
Many factors could cause the market price of our common stock to
fluctuate, including:
•
variations in our quarterly operating results;
•
announcements regarding the progress of the proposed merger with
Micron;
•
announcements of technological innovations by us or by our
competitors;
•
introductions of new products or new pricing policies by us or
by our competitors;
•
departure of key personnel;
•
the gain or loss of significant orders or customers;
•
sales of common stock by our officers and directors;
•
changes in the estimates of our operating performance or changes
in recommendations by securities analysts;
•
announcements related to our outstanding litigation; and
•
market conditions in our industry and the economy as a whole.
In addition, stocks of technology companies have experienced
extreme price and volume fluctuations that often have been
unrelated or disproportionate to these companies’ operating
performance. Public announcements by companies in our industry
concerning, among other things, their performance, accounting
practices or legal problems could cause fluctuations in the
market for stocks of these companies. These fluctuations could
lower the market price of our common stock regardless of our
actual operating performance.
In the past, securities class action litigation has often been
brought against a company following a period of volatility in
the market price of its securities. Following just such a period
of volatility in the market price of our securities, we were
named as a defendant in federal securities class action
litigation and named a nominal defendant in similar derivative
litigation against certain of our officers and directors.
Although the plaintiffs in those actions dismissed the
litigation with prejudice, similar litigation in the future
could result in substantial costs and divert management’s
attention and resources, which could harm our operating results
and our business. The conduct of any such proceedings could
negatively impact our stock price, and an unfavorable outcome
could have a material adverse impact on our financial position
and liquidity.
Risks Related to Our Industry
Our business will not succeed unless the digital
photography market and other markets that we target continue to
grow or unless we diversify our product sales into adjacent
markets.
We currently depend on sales of digital media and connectivity
products to digital camera owners for a substantial portion of
our revenues, which exposes us to substantial risk in the event
the digital photography market does not continue to grow
rapidly. The digital photography market has grown very rapidly
over the last several years and may now be reaching maturity and
lower growth rates. The success of this market depends on many
factors, including:
•
the availability of digital cameras at prices and with
performance characteristics comparable to traditional cameras;
•
the availability of digital media that meets users’
requirements with respect to price, speed, connectivity,
capacity and compatibility;
•
the speed at which digital cameras are able to take successive
photographs;
•
the ease with which digital files can be transferred to a
personal computer or printer;
the availability of digital image prints comparable in quality
and price to traditional photographs; and
•
market conditions in the industry and the economy as a whole.
In addition to the above factors related to the digital
photography market as a whole, we believe the following
additional factors will affect the successful adoption of
digital photography by consumers:
•
marketing campaigns that increase brand awareness in end-user
markets, both domestically and internationally;
•
increased association between brand names and attractive price
and performance characteristics; and
•
heightened consumer confidence in digital photography technology.
Over the last several years, we have derived the majority of our
revenue from the digital camera market. However, we expect that
the digital photography market will experience significantly
slower growth rates over the next several years. Newer
applications such as USB storage devices, cell phones, personal
digital assistants and MP3 players now utilize substantial
volumes of flash memory. Our future growth will be increasingly
dependent on the development and penetration of new markets and
new products for NAND flash memory. If we are unable to
successfully expand our product offerings into these markets and
into the channels that serve these markets, demand for our
products may not increase at the same rates as they have in the
past.
We have traditionally focused on removable digital media and it
is presently unclear whether certain of these new applications
will use or continue to use removable digital media is unclear.
Cell phones, for example, could use embedded rather than
removable storage. In addition, USB storage devices, cell phones
or MP3s could use miniature hard disk technologies rather than
flash based digital media. Such developments would likely result
in a reduction of anticipated future demand for our current line
of digital media thereby negatively impacting our revenues,
revenue growth and gross margins.
There can be no assurance that new markets and products will
develop and grow fast enough, or that new markets will adopt
NAND flash technologies or our products, to enable us to
continue our growth. If the digital photography market does not
continue to grow and be accepted by professional, commercial and
consumer users, or if any reduction in demand in digital
photography is not absorbed by new applications, we will not
continue to grow at the rates that we have in prior years.
General economic conditions, political and military
conditions associated with current worldwide conflicts and
similar events may prevent consumers from purchasing our
products, and reduced demand for digital media and related
products may prevent us from achieving targeted revenues and
profitability.
Our revenues and our ability to return to profitability depend
significantly on the overall demand for flash cards and related
products. Sales of consumer electronic goods, including our
products, have historically been dependent upon discretionary
spending by consumers, which may be adversely affected by
general economic conditions. Changes in the United States and
the global economy, such as a decline in consumer confidence or
a slowdown in the United States economy, may cause consumers to
defer or alter purchasing decisions, including decisions to
purchase our products. If the economy declines as a result of
recent economic, political and social turmoil, consumers may
reduce discretionary spending and may not purchase our products,
which would harm our revenues as softening demand caused by
worsening economic conditions has done in the past.
If digital camera manufacturers do not develop and promote
products that are able to take advantage of our fastest digital
media products, the growth and success of our business may be
limited.
We depend on the research and development, marketing and sales
efforts of digital camera manufacturers in developing, marketing
and selling digital cameras that can use our more advanced
existing and future products. Most of the digital cameras
currently available on the market do not incorporate
technologies that can take advantage of the speed available in
our fastest digital film products or the advanced features
available in some of our products, such as LockTight
CompactFlash. If digital camera manufacturers do not
successfully develop, market and sell digital cameras that take
full advantage of our most advanced products,
from which we realize higher gross margins, the growth and
success of our business may be negatively impacted.
The manufacturing of our products is complex and subject
to yield problems, which could decrease available supply and
increase costs.
The manufacture of flash memory and controllers is a complex
process, and it is often difficult for companies to achieve
acceptable product yields. Reduced flash memory yields could
decrease available supply and increase costs. Controller yields
depend on both our product design and the manufacturing process
technology unique to the semiconductor foundry. Because low
yields may result from either design defects or process
difficulties, we may not identify yield problems until well into
the production cycle, when an actual product exists and can be
analyzed and tested. In addition, many of these yield problems
are difficult to diagnose and time consuming or expensive to
remedy.
Risks Related to Intellectual Property
If we are unable to adequately protect our intellectual
property, our competitors may gain access to our technology,
which could harm our ability to successfully compete in our
market.
We regard our intellectual property as critical to our success.
If we are unable to protect our intellectual property rights, we
may be unable to successfully compete in our market.
We rely on a combination of patent, copyright, trademark and
trade secret laws, as well as confidentiality agreements and
other methods to protect our proprietary technologies. As of
March 13, 2006, we had been granted or allowed 96 patents
in the United States and other countries and had 91 pending
United States and foreign patent applications. We cannot assure
you, however, that:
•
any of our existing or future patents will not be invalidated;
•
patents will be issued for any of our pending applications;
•
any claims allowed from existing or pending patents will have
sufficient scope or strength; or
•
our patents will be issued in the primary countries where our
products are sold in order to protect our rights and potential
commercial advantage.
It may also be possible for a third party to copy or otherwise
obtain and use our products or technology without authorization,
develop similar technology independently or design around our
patents.
We are involved in intellectual property litigation, and
expect to become involved in additional litigation that could
divert management’s time and attention, be time-consuming
and expensive to defend and limit our access to important
technology.
We are a party to litigation with third parties to protect our
intellectual property or as a result of an alleged infringement
of others’ intellectual property. We expect to be involved
in additional patent litigation in the future. These lawsuits
could subject us to significant liability for damages. These
lawsuits could also lead to the invalidation of our patent
rights. Patent lawsuits are extremely expensive and
time-consuming and can divert management’s time and
attention. When we sue other companies for patent infringement,
it may prompt them to respond by suing us for infringement of
their patents. We are also negotiating license agreements with
third parties, which could result in litigation if these
negotiations are unsuccessful. Additional patent litigation
would significantly increase our legal expenses, which would
result in higher operational expenses and lower operating
margins. We are currently in patent litigation with Toshiba. In
this litigation, we have asserted that Toshiba infringes
thirteen of our patents through their sale of flash memory
chips, cards and cameras. In a separate action, Toshiba has
asserted that we infringe eight of Toshiba’s patents
through our sale of flash devices that we manufacture and
readers. Such products comprise a substantial portion of our
revenues. If we were found to infringe Toshiba’s patents or
if we were involved in other intellectual property litigation,
we could be forced to do one or more of the following:
•
pay damages on products that were found to infringe the other
party’s intellectual property;
•
stop selling products or using technology that contain the
allegedly infringing intellectual property;
•
attempt to obtain a license to the relevant intellectual
property, which license may not be available on reasonable terms
or at all; and
•
attempt to redesign those products that contain the allegedly
infringing intellectual property.
If we are forced to take any of the foregoing actions, we may
incur additional costs or be unable to manufacture and sell our
products.
We purchase a number of components and products from third
parties and if those products were alleged to violate the
intellectual property rights of a third party, we could become
involved in additional litigation that could be time-consuming
and expensive to defend or we could be forced to pay damages or
royalties.
We do not currently manufacture certain digital media formats
and currently purchase such products and components for such
products, including controllers from third parties for resale.
Not all of our suppliers provide us with indemnification
regarding such sales. Other suppliers impose limits on their
indemnification obligations. If such products infringe the
intellectual property rights of a third party, if our suppliers
refused to honor their indemnification obligations, or if we are
found to owe license fees or royalties relating to these
products, our margins and operating results would be severely
negatively impacted.
ITEM 1B
UNRESOLVED STAFF COMMENTS
None
ITEM 2
PROPERTIES
Our corporate headquarters and principal operating facility is
located in Fremont, California. Our headquarters is comprised of
approximately 72,500 square feet and is the primary
location for all our engineering, operations, administrative and
worldwide sales and marketing functions. We occupy this facility
under a lease that expires on April 30, 2009 and have an
option to renew this lease for an additional five-year period.
We also lease facilities in Brookwood, England, Tokyo, Japan,
Shanghai and Hong Kong, China, Singapore, and Boca Raton,
Florida. We lease approximately 8,300 square feet at our
Brookwood, England facilities where we carry out sales,
marketing and distribution operations under a lease that expires
on December 28, 2014. We lease approximately
2,200 feet of office space in Tokyo, Japan for sales,
marketing and distribution operations under a lease that expires
on September 30, 2007 and have the option to renew this
lease for an additional two-year period. We lease approximately
2,200 square feet of office space in Boca Raton, Florida
for product development activities. The lease for the Florida
office expires on May 31, 2006. We lease approximately
2,700 square feet of office space in Shanghai, China and
approximately 800 square feet of office space in Hong Kong,
China for sales and marketing operations under leases that
expire on February 19, 2008 and June 1, 2006,
respectively. We have an option to renew the lease in Hong Kong
for an additional three-year period. We lease approximately
1,900 square feet of office space in Singapore for sales
and marketing operations under a lease that expires on
September 30, 2008 and have an option to renew the lease
for an additional two-year period.
We are involved in three separate lawsuits with Toshiba as
follows:
Lexar Media, Inc. v. Toshiba Corporation, Toshiba
America, Inc. and Toshiba America Electronics Corporation
On November 4, 2002, we filed a lawsuit in Santa Clara
County Superior Court against Toshiba Corporation, Toshiba
America, Inc. and Toshiba America Electronics Corporation
(“TAEC”) alleging theft of trade secrets and breach of
fiduciary duty. We later filed an amended complaint to add
violation of California Business and Professions Code
Section 17200 and to drop without prejudice claims against
Toshiba America, Inc. The basis of our allegations were that
since our inception in 1996, and including the period from 1997
through 1999 when Toshiba was represented on our Board of
Directors, Toshiba had access to and was presented with details
of our strategy as well as our methods of achieving high
performance flash devices that Toshiba has now incorporated into
its flash chips and flash systems.
Trial began on February 7, 2005, and after a six-week
trial, on March 23, 2005 the jury found that Toshiba
Corporation and TAEC misappropriated our trade secrets and
breached their fiduciary duty to us. The jury awarded us
$255.4 million in damages for Toshiba’s
misappropriation of trade secrets. The jury also awarded us
$58.7 million in damages for Toshiba’s breach of
fiduciary duty, $58.7 million in damages for TAEC’s
breach of fiduciary duty and $8.2 million in prejudgment
interest for breach of fiduciary duty. The jury also found
Toshiba and TAEC’s breach of fiduciary duty was oppressive,
fraudulent or malicious which supported an award of punitive
damages. On March 25, 2005, the jury awarded an additional
$84.0 million in punitive damages. The total of these
awarded damages is over $465.0 million.
On October 5, 2005, the Superior Court of the State of
California entered a Statement of Decision in which it found
that Toshiba engaged in unfair or unlawful competition, thereby
violating California Business and Professions Code
Section 17200. However, the Court declined our request to
enter an injunction against Toshiba flash memory products that
incorporate our trade secrets and further declined to order any
additional monetary relief.
On December 2, 2005, the Court issued an order granting
defendants’ motion for a new trial on the economic and
monetary awards for misappropriation of trade secrets and breach
of fiduciary duty. The Court denied defendants’ motion for
a new trial on all other grounds and also denied the motion for
judgment notwithstanding the verdict. The effect of the
Court’s order is that the jury’s damage award of
approximately $465 million has been set aside and interest
will not accrue on this amount.
Both defendants and we have appealed the Court’s
December 2, 2005 order. Defendants have appealed from those
portions of the order that denies them a new trial on liability
and denies their motion for judgment notwithstanding the
verdict. We have appealed from that portion of the order that
grants defendants a new trial on damages. Defendants have also
protectively cross-appealed from the judgment, meaning that
should the order granting a new trial on damages be set aside,
the Court of Appeals would need to address aspects of the
judgment that defendants challenge in that context. In all
events, because of the parties’ cross appeals from the new
trial order, the Court of Appeals will address both damages and
liability issues presented by the jury’s verdict.
If the briefing goes as expected, we expect that the Court of
Appeals will hold argument on the appeals in the third or fourth
quarter of 2007. There are a number of possible dispositions of
the appeal, including an
across-the-board
affirmance of the order granting a new damages trial and denying
defendants’ motion for judgment notwithstanding the
verdict. If this occurs, and if the Supreme Court does not grant
review of the Court of Appeal’s decision, the new damages
trial would likely take place in the Santa Clara County
Superior Court in 2008. If the Supreme Court granted review,
however, the appellate proceedings would likely not conclude
until 2010, with a new damages trial possible thereafter.
Toshiba Corporation v. Lexar Media, Inc.; Lexar Media,
Inc. v. Toshiba Corporation
On November 1, 2002, Toshiba Corporation filed a lawsuit
seeking declaratory judgment that Toshiba does not infringe our
U.S. Patent Nos. 5,479,638; 5,818,781; 5,907,856;
5,930,815; 6,034,897; 6,040,997; 6,134,151; 6,141,249;
6,145,051; 6,172,906; 6,202,138; 6,262,918; 6,374,337; and
6,397,314 or that these patents are invalid. This suit was filed
in the United States District Court for the Northern District of
California. Toshiba does not seek monetary damages or an
injunction in this action. We believe that Toshiba’s claims
are without merit and are contesting this lawsuit vigorously.
On November 21, 2002, we filed an answer and counterclaim
in which we alleged that Toshiba infringes our U.S. Patent
Nos. 5,818,781; 5,907,856; 5,930,815; 6,034,897; 6,040,997;
6,134,151; 6,172,906; 6,202,138; and 6,374,337. We sought an
injunction and damages against Toshiba.
On December 20, 2002, Toshiba filed its first amended
complaint in which Toshiba dropped its allegations that our
patents are unenforceable.
On February 28, 2003, we filed an answer and our first
amended counterclaim against Toshiba for infringement of our
U.S. Patent Nos. 5,479,638; 5,818,781; 5,907,856;
5,930,815; 6,034,897; 6,040,997; 6,134,151; 6,141,249;
6,145,051; 6,172,906; 6,202,138; 6,262,918; 6,374,337; and
6,397,314. We are seeking damages as well as an injunction
against Toshiba for its products that we allege infringe our
patents, including its flash memory chips, flash cards and
digital cameras.
Claim construction in our litigation against Toshiba was held in
August 2004. The Court issued a claim construction ruling on
January 24, 2005. We believe that the claim construction
ruling favorably construes the claims of our patents.
This case has been coordinated for discovery purposes with our
litigation against Pretec Electronics Corporation
(“Pretec”), PNY Technologies, Inc. (“PNY”),
Memtek Products, Inc. (“Memtek”) and
C-One. Discovery has
now commenced as to all defendants. The Lexar patents at issue
in the first phase of the litigation will be Lexar’s
U.S. Patent Nos. 5,479,638 entitled “Flash Memory Mass
Storage Architecture Incorporation Wear Leveling
Technique”; 6,145,051 entitled “Moving Sectors Within
Block of Information in a Flash Memory Mass Storage
Architecture”; 6,397,314 entitled “Increasing The
Memory Performance Of Flash Memory Devices By Writing Sectors
Simultaneously To Multiple Flash Memory Device”; 6,202,138
entitled “Increasing The Memory Performance Of Flash Memory
Devices By Writing Sectors Simultaneously To Multiple
Flash”; 6,262,918 entitled “Space Management For
Managing High Capacity Nonvolatile Memory”; and 6,040,997
entitled “Flash Memory Leveling Architecture Having No
External Latch.” The parties have now mutually dismissed
with prejudice all claims regarding U.S. Patent
No. 6,172,906.
On June 8, 2005, the Court issued a scheduling order that
bifurcated discovery and trial issues relating to infringement
from those relating to willfulness and damages. The current
schedule anticipates that discovery will be completed in the
second calendar quarter of 2006. The Court has indicated that it
expects to hold a further status conference in the second half
of 2006 at which time it will rule on the timing and sequence of
trial in the various actions.
We expect that a trial will take place in one of the patent
actions in late 2006 or the first half of 2007.
Toshiba Corporation v. Lexar Media, Inc.
On January 13, 2003, Toshiba Corporation filed a lawsuit
against us in the United States District Court for the Northern
District of California, alleging that we infringe Toshiba’s
U.S. Patent Nos. 5,546,351; 5,724,300; 5,793,696;
5,946,231; 5,986,933; 6,145,023; 6,292,850; and 6,338,104. On
February 7, 2003, Toshiba Corporation filed an amended
complaint and now alleges that we infringe Toshiba’s
U.S. Patent Nos. 5,546,351; 5,724,300; 5,793,696;
5,946,231; 5,986,933; 6,094,697; 6,292,850; 6,338,104; and
5,611,067. In this action, Toshiba Corporation seeks injunctive
relief and damages. Toshiba’s patents appear to primarily
relate to flash components that we purchase from vendors who
provide us with indemnification. On March 5, 2003, we filed
an answer in which we are seeking a judgment that we do not
infringe these patents or that they are
invalid or unenforceable. We believe that Toshiba’s claims
are without merit and intend to contest this lawsuit vigorously.
Discovery in this case has commenced. This case has been
coordinated with the other patent litigation currently pending.
As discussed above, the current schedule anticipates that
discovery will be completed in the second calendar quarter of
2006. The Court has indicated that it expects to hold a further
status conference in the second half of 2006 at which time it
will rule on the timing and sequence of trial in the various
actions. We expect that a trial will take place in one of the
patent actions in late 2006 or the first half of 2007.
At this time, we are unable to reasonably estimate the possible
range of loss for this proceeding and, accordingly, have not
recorded any associated liabilities on our consolidated
financial statements at December 31, 2005.
Litigation Against Fuji, Memtek and PNY
On July 11, 2002, we filed a lawsuit in the United States
District Court for the Eastern District of Texas against Fuji
Photo Film USA (“Fuji”), Memtek and PNY for patent
infringement. We alleged that the defendants infringe our
U.S. Patent Nos. 5,479,638; 5,907,856; 5,930,815;
6,034,897; 6,134,151; 6,141,249; 6,145,051; and 6,262,918. We
sought injunctive relief and damages against all defendants.
On November 4, 2002, we filed an amended complaint against
Fuji. In the amended complaint, we allege that Fuji infringes
U.S. Patent Nos. 5,479,638; 6,141,249; 6,145,051;
6,262,918; and 6,397,314 through the sale of its flash memory
products and digital cameras. We are seeking injunctive relief
and damages against Fuji. Memtek and PNY are no longer parties
to this particular action. On December 9, 2002, Fuji filed
an answer in which they sought declaratory relief that they do
not infringe the five patents named in the suit as well as our
U.S. Patent Nos. 5,907,856; 5,930,815; 6,034,897; and
6,134,151.
On January 8, 2003, the United States District Court for
the Eastern District of Texas ordered this case transferred to
the United States District Court for the Northern District of
California where it is now pending.
In a second amended complaint, we added counterclaims for
infringement on the additional patents for which Fuji has sought
declaratory relief, U.S. Patent Nos. 5,907,856; 5,930,815;
6,034,897; and 6,134,151. Discovery in this case has commenced.
This case has been coordinated with the other patent litigation
currently pending. As discussed above, the current schedule
anticipates that discovery will be completed in the second
calendar quarter of 2006. The Court has indicated that it
expects to hold a further status conference in the second half
of 2006 at which time it will rule on the timing and sequence of
trial in the various actions.
We expect that a trial will take place in one of the patent
actions in late 2006 or the first half of 2007.
On September 16, 2005, Fuji filed a lawsuit against us in
the United States District Court for the Southern District of
New York, alleging that certain of our flash cards infringe
Fuji’s U.S. Patent No.’s 5,303,198; 5,386,539;
and 5,390,148. In this action, Fuji seeks injunctive relief and
damages.
On February 14, 2006, the Court granted our motion to
transfer this case to the United States District Court for the
Northern District of California where it is now pending.
We believe that Fuji’s claims are without merit and intend
to contest this lawsuit vigorously. At this time, we are unable
to reasonably estimate the possible range of loss for this
proceeding and, accordingly, have not recorded any associated
liabilities on our consolidated financial statements at
December 31, 2005.
Litigation Against Pretec, PNY, Memtek and C-One
On December 22, 2000, we sued Pretec and PNY for patent
infringement. We sued Pretec and PNY on the basis of four
patents: U.S. Patent Nos. 5,818,781; 5,907,856; 5,930,815;
and 6,145,051. The suit is pending in the United States District
Court for the Northern District of California. We are seeking
injunctive relief and damages against all defendants.
On April 13, 2001, we filed an amended complaint in our
litigation with Pretec and PNY, naming Memtek as an additional
defendant. On June 26, 2001, the Court allowed us to file
our second amended
complaint in our litigation with Pretec and PNY, naming C-One as
an additional defendant and adding our U.S. Patent
No. 5,479,638 against all of the defendants. In this action
we allege that PNY and the other defendants infringe our
U.S. Patent Nos. 5,479,638, 5,818,781, 5,907,856, 5,930,815
and 6,145,051. This suit is pending in the United States
District Court for the Northern District of California. We are
seeking injunctive relief and damages against all of the
defendants.
Discovery in this case has commenced. This case has been
coordinated with the other patent litigation currently pending.
As discussed above, the current schedule anticipates that
discovery will be completed in the second calendar quarter of
2006. The Court has indicated that it expects to hold a further
status conference in the second half of 2006 at which time it
will rule on the timing and sequence of trial in the various
actions. We expect that a trial will take place in one of the
patent actions in late 2006 or the first half of 2007.
Litigation With Willem Vroegh
On February 20, 2004, an individual, Willem Vroegh, sued
us, along with Dane-Elec Memory, Fuji, Eastman Kodak Company,
Kingston Technology Company, Inc., Memorex, PNY, SanDisk
Corporation, Verbatim Corporation, and Viking InterWorks,
alleging that our description of the capacity of our flash
memory cards is false and misleading under California Business
and Professions Code Sections 17200 and 17500. The
plaintiff has also asserted allegations for breach of contract,
common law claims of fraud, deceit and misrepresentation; as
well as a violation of the Consumers Legal Remedies Act,
California Civil Code Sec. 175, all arising out of the same set
of facts. Plaintiff seeks restitution, disgorgement,
compensatory damages and injunctive relief and attorneys’
fees.
In February 2006, we and other defendants entered into a
settlement agreement with the plaintiffs, subject to approval by
the Superior Court of the City and County of San Francisco,
pursuant to which the defendants agreed to: (i) provide
class members with either: (A) a cash refund equal to 5% of
the purchase price for each flash memory device purchased; or
(B) a 10% discount towards the purchase of a new flash
memory device; and (ii) make disclosures on future
packaging about the useable capacity of the defendants’
flash memory devices and (iii) pay up to $2,400,000 in the
aggregate in attorneys’ fees and expenses to
plaintiffs’ counsel. As of December 31, 2005, we had
accrued $900,000, our estimated portion of the attorney’s
fees and expenses along with our estimate of the cost of the
rebate or discount programs to us, in connection with the
settlement.
Stockholder Litigation
In March 2006, following the announcement of our agreement to be
acquired by Micron Technology, Inc. in a stock-for-stock merger,
we, along with our directors, were named as defendants in
several lawsuits purporting to be class actions in the Superior
Court for the State of California for the County of Alameda.
Those actions are brought allegedly on behalf of a class of
plaintiffs who are holders of our stock and assert claims that
the defendants engaged in self-dealing and breached their
fiduciary duties by agreeing to the merger. Two of the suits
also name Micron as a defendant. The claims are based on
allegations that, among other things, the consideration to be
paid to stockholders in the proposed merger is unfair and
inadequate. Plaintiffs seek, among other things, a declaration
that the defendants have breached their fiduciary duties,
injunctive relief (including enjoining the consummation of the
transaction or rescinding the transaction if consummated),
unspecified compensatory and/or rescissory damages, fees and
costs, and other relief.
We believe that the claims are without merit and intend to
contest these lawsuits vigorously. At this time, we are unable
to reasonably estimate the possible range of loss for these
stockholder litigation matters and, accordingly, have not
recorded any associated liabilities on our consolidated
financial statements at December 31, 2005.
SUBMISSION OF MATTERS TO A VOTE OF SECURITY HOLDERS
Not applicable.
PART II
ITEM 5
MARKET FOR REGISTRANT’S COMMON EQUITY, RELATED
STOCKHOLDER MATTERS AND ISSUER PURCHASES OF EQUITY
SECURITIES
Market Information for Common Stock
Our common stock began trading on The Nasdaq National Market on
August 15, 2000 under the symbol LEXR. The following table
sets forth the high and low sales prices reported on The Nasdaq
National Market for the periods indicated. The market price of
our common stock has been volatile. See “Risk Factors.”
As of March 14, 2006, we had approximately 110 record
holders of our common stock. In addition, there are several
thousand beneficial holders of our common stock.
Dividends
We have never paid any cash dividends on our common stock. We
currently anticipate that we will retain all future earnings for
use in our business, and do not anticipate paying any cash
dividends in the foreseeable future. Our credit facility with
Wells Fargo Foothill and the merger agreement that we entered
into with Micron include restrictions on our ability to pay
dividends.
During the fourth quarter of 2004, we experienced rapid
decreases in market pricing for our products, which resulted in
our reporting a substantial net loss for the fourth quarter of
2004. Starting in the fourth quarter of 2004, we determined that
due to the high volatility of prices in the retail market, we
were no longer able to reasonably estimate the level of revenue
allowances and product returns, and accordingly, we became
unable to determine the selling price of our products at the
time the sale takes place. As a result, effective
October 1, 2004, for all of our retail customers, where we
offered return rights and price protection, substantially all
revenues and the cost of revenues were deferred until these
customers either sold the product to their customers or a time
period that is reasonably estimated to allow these customers to
sell the product to their customers had elapsed. As a result of
recording revenues from all retail customers on a sell-through
basis effective October 1, 2004, the first quarter of 2005
was the first quarter in which we recorded significant revenue
that was deferred from the prior quarter. At no point do we
recognize product revenues or cost of product revenues while
deferring product margin. The change in the timing of
recognizing substantially all the revenue related to our
resellers now on a sell-through basis, some of which were
previously recognized on a sell-to basis, had the initial
one-time effect of reducing net revenues recorded in the fourth
quarter of 2004 by $63.6 million, reducing gross margin by
$9.4 million, and increasing net loss by $8.6 million.
As of December 31, 2004 and December 31, 2005,
deferred product margin from sales to resellers was
$23.2 million, and $13.1 million, respectively.
ITEM 7
MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL
CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS
The following discussion and analysis of our financial condition
and results of operations should be read in conjunction with our
consolidated financial statements and related notes included
elsewhere in this report. In addition to historical information,
this discussion contains forward-looking statements that involve
risks and uncertainties. These forward-looking statements
include statements about trends and uncertainties in our
business, such as our expectations about our liquidity, flash
memory supply, pricing strategy, plans to change product mix,
expected growth, plans to manufacture new flash memory products,
and expected future trends in component costs and operating
expense levels. Our actual results could differ materially from
those anticipated by these forward-looking statements due to
factors including, but not limited to, those set forth under
“Risk Factors” and elsewhere in this report. Readers
are cautioned not to place undue reliance on these
forward-looking statements, which speak only as of the date
hereof. We undertake no obligation to update these
forward-looking statements to reflect events or circumstances
occurring after the date hereof.
On March 8, 2006, we entered into a definitive merger
agreement with Micron Technology, Inc. and a wholly owned
subsidiary of Micron. The merger agreement provides that, upon
the terms and subject to the conditions provided in the merger
agreement, Micron’s subsidiary will merge with and into
Lexar, with Lexar being the surviving corporation of the merger.
As a result of the merger: (i) Lexar will become a wholly
owned subsidiary of Micron; and (ii) each outstanding share
of our common stock will be converted into the right to receive
0.5625 shares of Micron common stock and Micron will assume
stock options held by our employees at the closing date with a
per share exercise price of $9.00 or lower.
Overview
We design, develop, manufacture and market through our retail
and original equipment manufacturer (OEM) channels
high-performance digital media, as well as other flash based
storage products for consumer and professional markets that
utilize digital media for the capture and retrieval of digital
content for the digital
photography, consumer electronics, computer, industrial and
communications markets. Our digital media products include a
variety of flash memory cards with a range of speeds, capacities
and special features to satisfy the various demands of different
users of flash cards. To address the growing market for compact
digital data and media storage solutions, our digital media
products also include our JumpDrive products, which are
high-speed, portable USB flash drives for consumer applications
that serve a variety of uses, including floppy disk replacement.
In addition, we market and sell controllers and other components
to other manufacturers of flash storage media as well as digital
media accessories and a variety of connectivity products that
link our media products to PCs and other electronic host
devices. We also license our technology to certain third parties.
In the first quarter of 2005, we announced that we would focus
our business on profitability, potentially at the expense of
revenue growth and market share. Consistent with this strategy,
during 2005, we reduced the number of our promotional programs
and, although we lowered our selling prices, we did so on a
selective basis and generally maintained a price premium in
relation to our competitors’ prices. This strategy resulted
in a significant decrease in our rate of revenue growth and a
loss of market share during 2005. Our product gross margins
increased during 2005 to 9.7% compared to 4.4% in 2004. Our
product gross margins in 2005 included a one-time negotiated
cost settlement with a supplier which had the effect of
significantly improving our gross product margins by
approximately 1.3 percentage points. However, in the first
quarter of 2006, our competitors made very significant across
the board price decreases that affected substantially all of our
products. These price decreases generally ranged from 20 to
35 percent. In response to these competitive pricing
pressures in the first quarter of 2006, we have had to adjust
our strategy and we have significantly lowered our prices in an
effort to remain competitive in the market place. We may be
required to make further price reductions, which could
negatively affect our product revenues. We intend to continue to
manage our selling prices with the intention of focusing on
profitability as much as possible while balancing our goal to
maintain our retail market position. If we cannot offset such
lower prices with lower costs through our suppliers, it will
have a negative impact on our gross margins. We are also
planning to take steps to change our product mix by emphasizing
sales of our premium products, which generally carry higher
gross margins, and we continue to seek additional license and
royalty income.
During 2005, although our product revenues increased 24.0%
compared to 2004, our retail product revenue increased only
$16.1 million or 2.6% as certain of our resellers have not
accepted price premiums for our products, and have added other
vendors’ products. At other resellers where we are priced
at a premium to our competition, our sell through has declined
or has not grown as quickly as the market has grown. At the same
time, we significantly increased sales of controllers, digital
media accessories and other components to OEM customers, largely
driven by opportunistic sales of other components, and sales of
these products generally provide a slightly lower gross margin
percentage than our digital media sales. We expect that such
sales of other components will decrease in the first quarter of
2006 and beyond. Product revenues from sales to the OEM channel,
primarily consisting of other components, increased to
$196.7 million in 2005 compared to $50.7 million in
2004.
If the retail selling prices of our products are not competitive
with our competitors’ selling prices, our resellers may
further reduce their orders, purchase from other vendors or
return unsold product to us within the scope of their
agreements. During 2005, we have lost product placements to our
competitors at Wal-Mart (including Sam’s Club), Comp USA,
Best Buy and Circuit City and other resellers due to our pricing
strategy and competitive pricing pressures. We also experienced
an increase in product returns as a result. In addition, at
Wal-Mart (including Sam’s Club), which collectively
accounted for 19.6% of our gross revenue in 2005, we may
experience a significant decline in sales due to their addition
of other vendors’ products into their stores.
We are focused on efforts aimed at ensuring that our costs for
flash memory and components will enable us to sell our products
at competitive prices, that our supply of flash memory and flash
card components is sufficient to meet our anticipated supply
needs, that our supply chain can support the rates of growth we
expect and that we have sufficient engineering resources to
design the products demanded by our customers. During the second
quarter of 2004, we began to diversify our suppliers of flash
memory. New flash suppliers continue to increase their
production capacity and product offerings. Although new flash
suppliers are now introducing competitive products at the 4 and
8 gigabit capacities, respectively, we expect that Samsung,
Toshiba and Hynix will continue to be the largest providers to
the market for high density flash chips as new flash memory
suppliers generally transition to producing higher density chips
over a period of time.
We continue to focus on five specific areas: (1) to further
optimize our supply chain; (2) to improve our sales mix
towards our more profitable products; (3) to continue to
adjust our sales and marketing strategy to focus more on
profitability; (4) to further seek to lower costs
generally; and (5) to further strengthen our organization
and processes.
We expect that rapid price declines will continue to be a major
challenge for our business. We expect that competitive pricing
pressures will be most significant in the first half of 2006 as
demand is typically seasonally weaker and as new flash supply is
becoming available. We also expect demand for our products in
the first half of 2006 to be weaker than during the second half
of 2006 due to the seasonality of our business. During periods
of rapid price declines, we must manage our internal,
consignment and channel inventories carefully while balancing
the need to meet the demands of our customers quickly. Any
reduction in prices by us will hurt our gross margins unless we
can manage our internal, consignment and channel inventories and
gain lower competitive prices from our suppliers to reduce our
cost structure and minimize the impact of such price declines.
As a result, we have been, and continue to be, actively focusing
our planning efforts to optimize our supply chain and reduce our
inventories. During 2005 we reduced our inventory from
$177.7 million at December 31, 2004 to
$117.1 million at December 31, 2005. We have also
adjusted our business model to build products generally to
buffer inventory based on when our customers order those
products rather than build products to forecast and in advance
of receiving orders from our customers. Our build to buffer
based on orders model will still include certain inventory to
enable us to adequately support our customers but will also
increase the risk that we will not be able to meet our
customers’ quick turn needs or upside demand. In addition,
we are working with our suppliers to reduce our cycle times and
reduce the component and assembly cost of our products. We are
also expecting to rationalize the number of products we offer to
the market in order to make our internal and channel inventory
management more effective. We have focused on expanding our
distribution channels, particularly internationally, and working
to ensure our products are available at outlets where consumers
look to purchase these products and expanding our sales to
markets other than retail, particularly to OEM customers.
We face other challenges as well. Flash card formats continue to
change and to miniaturize. We are focused to ensure we have the
rights to manufacture and sell all flash card and USB flash
drive formats, that we have the engineering resources to design
controllers for all media formats and design or source advanced
features into our products and that we have partners with
manufacturing capabilities that allow us to produce the newest
and most advanced flash card formats and high capacity cards. We
also believe that a number of companies are selling flash
products or devices that are based on flash memory, such as MP3
players, that infringe our intellectual property, and we are
focused on protecting our intellectual property through
litigation or negotiations. We believe that meeting such
challenges will be necessary to remain competitive in our
markets.
During the fourth quarter of 2004, we experienced rapid
decreases in market pricing for our products, which resulted in
our reporting a substantial net loss for the fourth quarter of
2004. Starting in the fourth quarter of 2004, we determined that
due to the high volatility of prices in the retail market, we
were no longer able to reasonably estimate the level of revenue
allowances and product returns, and accordingly, we became
unable to determine the selling price of our products at the
time the sale takes place. As a result, effective
October 1, 2004, for all of our retail customers, where we
offer return rights and price protection, revenues and the cost
of product revenues are deferred until these customers either
sell the product to their customers or a time period that is
reasonably estimated to allow these customers to sell the
product to their customers has elapsed. As a result of recording
revenues from all retail customers, who receive return rights
and price protection, on a sell-through basis effective
October 1, 2004, the first quarter of 2005 was the first
quarter in which we recorded significant revenue that was
deferred from the prior quarter. At no point do we recognize
product revenues or cost of product revenues while deferring
product margin.
Revenues. Prior to 2005, we generated revenues primarily
from the sale of digital media to end-users through mass market,
photo and OEM channels. In 2005, we generated
$640.0 million from the retail
channel, $196.7 million from the OEM channel, as compared
to $623.9 million and $50.7 million, respectively, in
2004. In addition, we generated $16.0 million of license
and royalty revenues in 2005 versus $7.1 million in 2004.
Since the beginning of 2002, we have significantly increased our
presence in the mass-market channel by increasing the number of
retail storefronts in which our customers sell our products. Our
products were sold in approximately 71,000 retail stores
worldwide at the end of the fourth quarter of 2005, which is an
increase of approximately 5,000 retail stores from the end of
2004. However, because of our pricing strategy, we experienced a
loss of market share during 2005 as some of our resellers have
not accepted price premiums for our products, and have added
other vendors’ products. At other resellers where we are
priced at a premium to our competition, our sell through has
declined or has not grown as quickly as the market has grown. As
is common practice in the mass-market channel, we offer our
customers various programs and incentive offerings, including
price protection, market development funds and cooperative
marketing programs, rebates and other discounts. Retail sales
comprised 91.5% and 75.0% of our total net revenues for the 2004
and 2005, respectively. In 2005, while our product revenues
increased 24.0% compared to 2004, our product revenue related to
sales to retailers increased $16.1 million or 2.6% as a
percentage of our total product revenue.
As discussed above, we also generate revenues from our OEM
channel sales, primarily of other components, which represented
7.5% and 23.1% of our total net revenues for 2004 and 2005,
respectively. While we expect to continue the sale of other
components to OEM customers, as the supply of flash memory
increases, our expectation is that these types of sales will
significantly decrease in the first quarter of 2006 over the
fourth quarter of 2005.
In addition, as discussed above, we generate license and royalty
revenues under license agreements, which revenues have
historically been primarily from Samsung and Sony.
During October 2005, we entered an agreement that extended the
term of the original Samsung license agreement for five years
through March 2011 and significantly expanded the scope of the
original license agreement to cover Samsung products that were
not previously included in the original license grant. We also
agreed to provide Samsung with technical support for a period of
three years. As a result, we received significant licensing
payments during the fourth quarter of 2005 and in the first
quarter of 2006. These payments will not recur after the first
quarter of 2006. The payments received under this agreement are
being recognized over a 3 year period beginning in November
2005. This period corresponds to the estimated period over which
we expect to provide support to this licensee. License and
royalty revenues from all licensees were approximately
$9.7 million and $16.0 million during the fourth
quarter and 2005, respectively. Variable based royalties
recognized in 2005 were $13.5 million, of which
$5.3 million related to sales in 2004. Our license and
royalty revenues may fluctuate significantly from quarter to
quarter depending in part on the sales of our licenses. We are
actively seeking to license our technology to other companies,
including companies that we believe infringe our patents.
A significant portion of our sales have been to a limited number
of customers. Our top 10 customers accounted for 49.1% and 47.9%
of our gross revenues for 2004 and 2005, respectively. We expect
that sales to a limited number of customers will continue to
account for a substantial portion of our revenues for at least
the next several years.
Product sales in North America have historically accounted for
the majority of our total net product revenues. Net product
revenues in North America represented approximately 65.4% and
62.8% of our total net product revenues for the year ended
December 31, 2004 and 2005, respectively. Over the long
term, we expect our sales outside of North America will increase
as a percentage of our total net product revenues. Net product
revenues in Europe declined from 22.6% to 13.7%, of our total
net product revenues for the year ended December 31, 2004
and 2005, respectively, primarily due to the impact of our focus
on selling our products profitably rather than focusing on
revenue growth and market share. Net product revenues in Japan
and the rest of the world represented 23.5% of our total net
product revenues for the year ended December 31, 2005,
compared with 12.0% for the year ended December 31, 2004.
The increase in net product revenues in Japan and rest of the
world is due to other components sales, which represented 13.1%
to our total net product revenues for the year ended
December 31, 2005, whereas 2004 had no OEM sales of other
components.
The markets we serve with our digital media products have been
expanding rapidly. This has increased the pressure on our
ability to ensure an adequate supply of components and the
scalability of our operations to meet surges in product demand
such as we experienced. On a continuing basis, we must forecast
our customers’ product mix and volume accurately to ensure
that we can meet their demands. If we are unable to forecast our
customers’ product mix and volume accurately it may affect
our ability to grow our revenues as projected and could result
in product obsolescence or inventory write-downs, which would
harm our operating results, which we have experienced in 2005.
In the second quarter of 2004, we entered into an exclusive,
multi-year agreement with Eastman Kodak whereby we offer digital
media for sale to customers under the Kodak brand name on a
worldwide basis. We began introducing such products in the third
quarter of 2004. Kodak branded products have steadily increased
through the fourth quarter of 2005. As a percentage of our net
product revenues Kodak branded product increased through the
second quarter of 2005 and maintained its percentage of revenues
during the third and fourth quarter of 2005. We have obligations
to meet certain annual financial and other periodic
non-financial targets in the agreement which we have not met and
which failure will give Kodak the right to terminate the
exclusivity of the agreement or to terminate it entirely.
Cost of Product Revenues. Our cost of product revenues
consists primarily of materials costs, with flash memory
accounting for a majority of the costs for both the products we
manufacture and most of the products we purchase. Cost of
product revenues also includes expenses related to materials
procurement, inventory management, other overhead expenses and
adjustments. We maintain relationships with key suppliers and,
in particular, we have supply agreements with both Samsung and
Hynix as well as with other flash suppliers. In 2001, we entered
into a supply agreement with Samsung. Since that time, we have
purchased the majority of our flash memory from Samsung with
such price based upon an agreed methodology. Samsung has
guaranteed a certain allocation of flash memory production
capacity to us. In addition, Samsung also has the right to
purchase our flash memory controllers. Under the agreement,
Samsung provides us with intellectual property indemnification
for the products we purchase from Samsung, as well as industry
standard warranties. On October 27, 2005, we announced an
extension of our supply agreement with Samsung through
March 24, 2011. The agreement also expands the range of
products covered by the original agreement and improves our
overall terms of purchase.
We also have an agreement with UMC for the manufacture and
supply of our flash memory controllers. Under our supply
agreement with UMC we purchase wafers at pricing based upon the
timing and volume of purchases. The purchase commitment for such
wafers is generally restricted to a forecasted time horizon
based on a rolling forecast of our anticipated purchase orders,
and such forecasts may only be changed by a certain percentage
each month. The agreement is in effect through December 2006. We
have also entered into a supply agreement with SMI, whereby SMI
supplies us with controllers for certain of our digital media
products. We are obligated to provide rolling forecasts to SMI
and SMI has agreed to maintain a buffer stock to meet our needs.
SMI also provides us with standard warranty and indemnity
protections. This agreement runs through September 2007 and may
be terminated by either party in the event of the other
party’s bankruptcy or breach of the agreement.
The cost of flash memory has been volatile due to increasing
demand as more applications utilize NAND flash memory, new
technologies are developed and more flash memory production
capacity becomes available. In the latter half of 2004, the cost
of flash memory declined as supply exceeded demand in certain
densities and in anticipation of additional supply of flash
memory. During 2005, the cost of flash memory declined slower
than the retail prices.
A number of companies, including Hynix, Infineon, Micron and ST
Micro, entered the NAND flash market in 2004, and are expected
to bring additional capacity of NAND flash chips in 2006. Micron
and Intel recently formed a joint venture named IM Flash
Technologies, LLC which is expected to add significant capacity
in late 2006 and 2007. Other companies, including Samsung and
Toshiba, have announced that they plan to expand their
production of flash memory during 2006. If these companies
successfully introduce new high density products and/or expand
output of flash memory, it could create an over-supply situation
during certain periods of 2006, driving product prices down and
lowering our cost of flash. However, currently most of
the new flash supply is lower density chips that can only be
used cost effectively to manufacture lower capacity cards.
From time to time, we enforce our rights under our supply
agreements to ensure that the pricing terms are correctly
applied with respect to our purchases from these suppliers. As a
result of such activities, we may recognize adjustments to
amounts paid to such suppliers for products purchased in prior
periods. Differences between amounts determined as an adjustment
to those amounts are recognized in cost of product revenues as a
change in accounting estimate in the period that such a
determination is made. During the second quarter of 2005, in
connection with a one-time negotiated cost settlement with a
supplier, we recorded a benefit in cost of product revenues of
$10.8 million.
Research and Development. Our research and development
expenses include salaries and related expenses for research and
development personnel, fees for outside consultants, patent and
prototype development and materials costs. The technology in our
industry is evolving as flash cards and USB flash drives become
smaller in size, perform at faster speeds, have increased
storage capacity and require development of new hardware and
software applications to meet the demands of the target markets
we serve. In addition, as new suppliers of flash memory enter
the market, we will continue to evaluate their flash memory and
make modifications to our controller technology as necessary to
be able to utilize different types of flash memory technology in
our products. The number of digital media formats continues to
increase, and we need to develop and manufacture controllers for
each significant digital media format. As a result of these and
other developments, we believe that continued investment in
research and development is important to enable us to attain our
strategic objectives and we therefore expect research and
development expenses to increase during the next twelve months.
Sales and Marketing. Our sales and marketing expenses
include freight and fulfillment, market development expenses,
salaries and related expenses for sales and marketing personnel,
advertising, customer service, technical support, distribution
and travel and trade shows, and allowances for doubtful
accounts. We expect sales and marketing expenses to vary during
the next twelve months primarily in conjunction with changes in
sales volumes throughout the year.
General and Administrative. Our general and
administrative expenses include salaries and related expenses
for executive, administrative and operational personnel, fees
for professional services and other corporate expenses. We are
involved in several intellectual property litigation matters, as
we have focused our efforts to protect our intellectual property
rights and license our technology to those companies that we
believe infringe our intellectual property. We are also involved
in additional litigation, including product class action
litigation. In addition to our current litigation, a number of
companies have brought products to market that we believe may
infringe our intellectual property. Our legal expenses increased
substantially in the first quarter of 2005 due to the trial
against Toshiba. We experienced a significant reduction in the
level of legal costs in the second and third quarters of 2005 as
a result of the first Toshiba trial being completed; however, in
the fourth quarter the damages portion of the verdict in this
litigation was overturned. As a result of this and other ongoing
litigation we experienced a significant increase in legal
expenses in the fourth quarter of 2005. We expect that legal
costs will continue at a high rate through at least the first
half of 2006 partially as a result of the stockholder securities
lawsuits that have been filed against us and our directors
challenging the proposed merger with Micron. If another of our
legal actions were to proceed to trial, or if we become involved
in additional litigation, our legal expenses could significantly
increase beyond anticipated levels. In addition to increased
costs associated with our litigation, we also believe that our
general and administrative expenses will likely continue to
remain significant in 2006 primarily as a result of costs
associated with regulatory requirements related to compliance
with Section 404 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002.
Critical Accounting Policies and Estimates
Our discussion and analysis of our financial condition and
results of operations is based upon our consolidated financial
statements, which have been prepared in accordance with
accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of
America. The preparation of these financial statements requires
us to make estimates and assumptions that affect the reported
amounts of assets, liabilities, revenues and
expenses, and related disclosure of contingent assets and
liabilities. On an ongoing basis, we evaluate our estimates,
including those related to price protection, customer programs
and incentives, product returns, doubtful accounts, inventory
valuation reserves, investments, intangible assets, income taxes
and related valuation allowances, contingencies and litigation.
We base our estimates on historical experience and on various
other assumptions that we believe to be reasonable under the
circumstances, the results of which form the basis for making
judgments about the carrying values of assets and liabilities
and reported amounts of revenue and expenses that are not
readily apparent from other sources. Actual results may differ
materially from these estimates under different assumptions or
conditions.
Estimates and assumptions about future events and their effects
cannot be determined with certainty. These estimates and
assumptions may change as new events occur, as additional
information is obtained and as our operating environment
changes. These changes have been included in the consolidated
financial statements as soon as they became known. In addition,
we are periodically faced with uncertainties, the outcomes of
which are not within our control and will not be known for
prolonged periods of time. These uncertainties are discussed in
this report in the section entitled “Risk Factors.”
We believe the following critical accounting policies reflect
our most significant judgments and estimates used in the
preparation of our consolidated financial statements:
•
Revenue recognition, including price protection, rebates and
other customer programs; and
•
Valuation allowance and accrued liabilities, including sales
returns and other allowances, inventory reserves, warranty
accruals, the allowance for doubtful accounts and deferred tax
asset valuation allowances.
Revenue Recognition
Product Revenues
We derive revenues from sales of our digital media products,
which are comprised of flash memory devices, through our retail
channels and from sales of digital media accessories and other
components through our OEM channel. We sell our products to
distributors, retailers, OEMs and end users. We use significant
management judgments and estimates in connection with the
revenue recognized in any accounting period.
Our policy is to recognize revenue from sales to our customers
when the rights and risks of ownership have passed to the
customers, when persuasive evidence of an arrangement exists,
the product has been delivered, the price is fixed or
determinable and collection of the resulting receivable is
reasonably assured.
With respect to sales to OEMs and end users, we do not grant
return rights, price protection or other sales incentives.
Accordingly, we recognize product revenue upon delivery if our
revenue recognition criteria described above are met.
With respect to sales to distributors and retailers
(collectively referred to herein as “resellers”), we
grant significant return rights, price protection and pricing
adjustments subsequent to initial product shipment. Prior to the
fourth quarter of 2004, for resellers where we were able to
reasonably estimate the level of product returns and sales
incentives, we recognized revenue upon shipment
(“ship-to” basis) and, at the time revenue was
recorded, we recorded estimated reductions to product revenues
based upon our customer sales incentive programs and the
historical experience of the product returns, and the impact of
the special pricing agreements, price protection, promotions and
other volume-based incentives. In order to make such estimates,
we analyzed historical returns, current economic conditions,
customer demand and other relevant specific customer
information. For resellers where we were unable to reasonably
estimate the level of product returns or other revenue
allowances, revenue and cost of product revenues were deferred
until these resellers either sold the product to their customers
or a time period that is reasonably estimated to allow these
resellers to sell the product to their customers had elapsed.
Starting in the fourth quarter of 2004, we determined that due
to the high volatility of prices in the retail market during the
period, we were no longer able to reasonably estimate the level
of revenue allowances and product returns, and accordingly, we
became unable to determine the selling price of our product at
the time the sale took place. As a result, effective
October 1, 2004, for all
our resellers, revenue and cost of product revenues are deferred
until these resellers either sell the product to their customers
or a time period that is reasonably estimated to allow these
resellers to sell the product to their customers has elapsed. At
no point do we recognize revenues or cost of product revenues
while deferring product margin.
We record estimated reductions to revenue for customer and
distributor incentive programs and offerings, including price
protection, promotions, co-op advertising, and other
volume-based incentives and expected returns. Additionally, we
have incentive programs or rebates that require us to estimate,
based on historical experience, the number of customers who will
actually redeem the incentive. Marketing development programs
are either recorded as a reduction to revenue or as an addition
to marketing expense in compliance with the consensus reached by
the Emerging Issues Task Force, or EITF, of the Financial
Standards Accounting Board, or FASB, on
Issue 01-09.
License and Royalty Revenues
We recognize license revenue when we have a signed license
agreement, the technology has been delivered, there are no
remaining significant obligations under the contract, the fee is
fixed or determinable and non-refundable and collectibility is
reasonably assured. If we agree to provide support to the
licensee under the agreement we recognize license fees ratably
over the period during which the support is expected to be
provided independent of the payment schedule under the license
agreement. When royalties are based on the volume of products
sold that incorporate our technology, revenue is recognized in
the period license sales are reported.
We actively enforce our patented technologies and aggressively
pursue third parties that are utilizing our intellectual
property without a license or who have under-reported the amount
of royalties owed under license agreements with us. As a result
of such activities, from time to time, we may recognize royalty
revenues that relate to infringements that occurred in prior
periods. These royalty revenues may cause revenues to be higher
than expected during a particular reporting period and may not
occur in subsequent periods. Differences between amounts
initially recognized and amounts subsequently determined as an
adjustment to those amounts are recognized in the period such
adjustment is determined as a change in accounting estimate.
Valuation Allowances and Accrued Liabilities
Valuation of Inventory
Our inventories are stated at the lower of cost or market value.
Cost includes materials, labor and other overhead costs.
Determining market value of inventories involves numerous
judgments, including average selling prices and sales volumes
for future periods. We primarily utilize estimated selling
prices for measuring any potential declines in market value
below cost. Any write-down of inventory to reduce carrying value
to lower of cost or market value is charged to cost of product
revenues.
We perform comprehensive, detailed quarterly analyses of our
inventory to identify all excess and slow moving products to be
written off based on current forecasts, which takes into account
our knowledge of and expectations of industry and product
developments. We estimate any write-downs to inventory to reduce
its carrying value to its lower of cost or market value based on
current and expected selling prices over the period that the
related inventory is expected to be sold. Inventory write-downs
are recorded as cost of product revenues.
Changes to increase the inventory valuation reserve for lower of
cost or market provision or excess and obsolete inventory
provision are charged to cost of product revenues. At the point
of this loss recognition, a new, lower-cost basis for that
inventory is established and subsequent changes in facts and
circumstances do not result in the restoration or increase in
that newly established cost basis. If this lower-costed
inventory is subsequently sold, the related allowance is matched
to the movement of related product inventory, resulting in lower
costs and higher gross margins for those products. During 2003,
2004 or 2005, the effect of the sale or disposition of
previously written down inventory on our gross margin percentage
was not significant.
We operate in an industry that is characterized by intense
competition, supply shortages or oversupply, rapid technological
change, evolving industry standards, declining average selling
prices and rapid product obsolescence. If actual product demand
or selling prices are less favorable than we estimate, we may be
required to take additional inventory write-downs.
Deferred Tax Valuation Allowance
As part of the process of preparing our consolidated financial
statements, we are required to estimate our income taxes, which
involve estimating our actual current tax liabilities together
with assessing temporary differences resulting from differing
treatment of items for tax and accounting purposes, such as
deferred revenue. These differences have resulted in a net
deferred tax asset. Our judgment is required to assess the
likelihood that the net deferred tax asset will be recovered
from future taxable income. We have determined that it is more
likely than not that the net deferred tax asset will not be
realizable. Accordingly, a full valuation allowance has been
recorded against the net deferred tax asset. In the event
management determines that it has become more likely than not
that the net deferred tax asset will be realizable in the
future, an adjustment to the deferred tax asset valuation
allowance would be made, which would increase income and
additional paid in capital in the period such determination is
made. As of December 31, 2005, we had a deferred tax asset
valuation allowance of $96.3 million of which
$21.2 million is attributable to stock option plans, the
benefit from which will be credited to additional paid in
capital when recognized.
Other Valuation Allowances and Accrued Liabilities
We maintain accruals and allowances for returns, warranty and
sales related discounts such as price protection, market
development funds and cooperative marketing programs and
rebates. We provided for returns, warranty and sales related
discounts amounting to $55.1 million, $120.8 million,
and $100.0 million during 2003, 2004, and 2005,
respectively. At December 31, 2004 and 2005, we had related
accruals and allowances of $56.3 million, and
$47.3 million, respectively. Price protection, market
development funds and cooperative marketing programs, rebates
and other discounts are provided for at the time the associated
revenue is recognized. If market conditions were to change
adversely, we may take actions to increase our customer
incentive offerings, which could result in increased accruals
and allowances for these programs. Historically, warranty
expenses have not been material. In the event that a problem is
identified that would result in the need to replace a product or
products on a large scale, such an event will result in charges
that would be recorded in the determination of net income (loss)
in the period in which the additional cost is identified and may
have a material adverse effect on our operating results and
financial position. In the second quarter of 2005, in
collaboration with Canon, we identified a lost image condition
found to be rare and specific to select Canon cameras when used
with CompactFlash cards, including our own. To ensure
compatibility, we offered to rework our Professional 80x
CompactFlash cards and Canon offered a camera firmware update to
address issues experienced with other cards for customers who
experienced the problem with the identified Canon cameras. We
and Canon continue to work together to ensure compatibility
across product lines. The total estimated cost to rework the
affected products is expected to be approximately
$0.9 million, all of which was provided for in the second
quarter of 2005. Aggregate costs incurred to rework the affected
products have been $0.3 million through December 31,2005.
Allowance for Doubtful Accounts
We maintain an allowance for doubtful accounts for estimated
losses resulting from the inability of our customers to make
required payments. At December 31, 2004, and 2005, we had
an allowance for doubtful accounts of $1.2 million and
$1.7 million, respectively. If the financial condition of
our customers were to deteriorate, resulting in an impairment of
their ability to make payments, an increase in the allowance may
be required.
Results of Operations
In view of the rapidly changing nature of our market and our
operating history, we believe that
period-to-period
comparisons of our revenues and other operating results are not
necessarily meaningful, and should not
The following table sets forth revenues, cost of product
revenues and gross margin amounts from our consolidated
statements of operations expressed as a percentage of total net
revenues:
The following table sets forth cost of product revenues and
product gross margin amounts from our consolidated statements of
operations expressed as a percentage of product revenues:
Revenues through our retail channel increased $16.1 million
in 2005 compared to 2004 as we experienced a 44.3% decline in
our average gross selling price per megabyte of digital media,
which was partially offset by a
74.3% increase in megabytes sold. The increase in megabytes sold
was due to the 54.2% increase in the average capacity per
digital media unit sold in the retail and OEM channels along
with a 13.0% increase in digital media units sold in 2005
compared with 2004. Revenues from our OEM channel increased
$146.0 million to $196.7 million, in 2005 compared to
$50.7 million in 2004. During 2005, our product revenue
related to sales to resellers decreased to 76.5% as a percentage
of our total product revenue as a result of our focus on
profitability, compared to 92.5% of our revenues in 2004.
We expect that the average capacity and number of units of
digital media sold will continue to increase in 2006 and that
the average gross selling price per megabyte of our digital
media will decline between 40% to 45% during the whole of 2006.
We expect a decrease in our sales of other components in the
first quarter of 2006.
In 2005, we derived 62.8%, 13.7%, 2.8% and 20.7% of our product
revenues from sales to customers in North America, Europe, Japan
and the rest of the world, respectively. In 2004, we derived
65.5%, 22.6%, 3.0% and 8.9% of our product revenues from sales
to customers in North America, Europe, Japan and the rest of the
world, respectively. During 2005, gross revenues from one
customer, Wal-Mart, represented approximately 20% of our gross
revenues.
We generate license and royalty revenues primarily from our
agreements with licensees under which we license the use of our
intellectual property. Our license and royalty revenues
increased to $16.0 million in 2005 from $7.1 million
in 2004, primarily due to increased volumes under our current
license agreements with Sony and Samsung and our expanded
licensing agreement with Samsung. During October 2005, we
entered into an agreement that extended the term of the original
Samsung license agreement for five years through March 2011 and
significantly expanded the scope of the original license
agreement to cover Samsung products that were not previously
included in the original license. As a result, we received
significant licensing payments during the fourth quarter of 2005
and in the first quarter of 2006. As these payments relate to
additional rights granted during the term of the original
license agreement, these payments will not recur after the first
quarter of 2006. The payments received under this agreement are
being recognized over a 3 year period beginning in November
2005. This period corresponds to the estimated period over which
we expect to provide support to the licensee. We will continue
to seek new licensing opportunities in 2006 and beyond. We
expect license and royalty revenue in 2006 to be in the rage of
$18 to $25 million.
Fiscal 2004 Compared with Fiscal 2003
Starting in the fourth quarter of 2004, we determined that due
to the recent high volatility of prices in the retail market, we
were no longer able to reasonably estimate the level of revenue
allowances and product returns, and accordingly, we became
unable to determine the selling price of our products at the
time the sale took place. As a result, effective October 1,2004, for all of our resellers, revenues and the cost of product
revenues were deferred until these resellers either sold the
product to their customers or a time period that was reasonably
estimated to allow these resellers to sell the product to their
customers had elapsed. The change in the timing of recognizing
revenue related to all resellers on a sell-through basis, some
of which were previously recognized on a sell-to basis, had the
initial one-time effect of reducing net revenues recorded in the
fourth quarter of 2004 by $63.6 million.
Increased sales of our flash memory products in the retail
channel were the major factor for the significant growth in our
product revenues in 2004. Increased sales into the retail market
continued to introduce an element of seasonality to our
business. For example, retail sales were very strong in both the
fourth quarters of 2003 and 2004 due to seasonal consumer demand
during the holidays. We experienced a 78.8% increase in retail
channel revenue in 2004 compared with 2003 due to increased
demand. In the OEM channels we increased 11.4% over 2003
revenues.
In 2004, we derived 65.5%, 22.6%, 3.0% and 8.9% of our product
revenues from sales to customers in North America, Europe, Japan
and the rest of the world, respectively. In 2003, we derived
72.2%, 17.2%, 4.7% and 5.9% of our product revenues from sales
to customers in North America, Europe, Japan and the rest of the
world, respectively. During 2004, gross revenues from one
customer, Wal-Mart (including Sam’s Club), represented
greater than 15% of our gross revenues.
We generate license and royalty revenues primarily from our
agreement with Samsung under which we license the use of our
intellectual property. Our license and royalty revenues
decreased from $17.7 million in 2003 to $7.1 million
in 2004 due to license and royalty revenues from Samsung
becoming variable in April 2004 as we generated minimal
variable-based royalties in 2004 under this agreement.
Cost of Product Revenues
Fiscal 2005 Compared with Fiscal 2004
Cost of product revenues increased during 2005 compared to 2004
primarily as a result of a 74.3% increase in megabytes sold and
was partially offset by a 46.4% decline in the cost per megabyte
of digital media sold in 2005 compared to 2004. Cost of product
revenues also includes the write down of fixed assets of
$1.0 million in 2005, the write-down of inventories
totaling $31.0 million in 2005 compared to
$17.4 million in 2004, to net realizable value. Cost of
product revenues in 2005 benefited from a one time negotiated
cost settlement with a supplier which resulted in a benefit of
$10.8 million, which was partially offset by a write-off of
$827,000 in obsolete tooling equipment and an additional
amortization expense of $485,000 in 2005 as a result of a change
in the estimated useful life of the remaining tooling equipment
from three years to two years.
We value our inventory at the lower of cost or market. We factor
in expected average sale prices and market data to arrive at our
net realizable value. End of life analysis is done based on a
six month forecast of product usage, and write downs are taken
as appropriate. We cannot predict future adjustments which may
need to be taken if forecasts change or pricing pressure
continues.
Fiscal 2004 Compared with Fiscal 2003
The increase in cost of product revenues was primarily the
result of both a 54.4% increase in the number of digital media
units sold due to increased demand and a 45.5% increase in the
average capacity per digital media unit sold. In addition, costs
of revenues in 2004 were impacted by an increase in inventory
valuation reserve of $17.4 million. These factors were
partially offset by a 30.3% decline in the average cost per
megabyte of digital media sold in 2004 compared to 2003.
Gross Margin
Fiscal 2005 Compared with Fiscal 2004
The increase in gross margin to 11.4% for 2005 compared to 5.4%
for 2004 was primarily due to the 5.3 percentage point
increase in gross product margin to 9.7% in 2005 compared to
4.4% in 2004. This improvement was primarily the result of the
46.4% decline in the cost per megabyte of digital media sold in
2005 compared to 2004, which was partially offset by the 44.3%
decline in our average gross selling price per megabyte of
digital media. The growth in revenue from sales of controllers,
digital media accessories and other components contributed to
the increased gross margin improvement. Gross margin for 2005
was negatively impacted by the write-down of inventories by
$31.0 million or 3.6 percentage points compared with
$17.4 million or 2.6 percentage points for 2004.
Additionally, gross margin for 2005 includes the impact of a
one-time negotiated cost settlement with a supplier in the
second quarter of 2005, which resulted in a benefit reflected in
gross margin of $10.8 million, or 1.3 percentage
points.
Fiscal 2004 Compared with Fiscal 2003
The decrease in gross margin percentage for product revenues was
primarily the result of the 44.2% decline in the average gross
selling price per megabyte of digital media sold partially
offset by the 30.3% decline in average cost per megabyte of
digital media unit sold. Gross margin in 2004 was also impacted
by the increase in inventory valuation reserve of
$17.4 million and the sale of inventories that had
previously been written off by approximately $0.6 million
in 2004.
The increase in research and development expenses for 2005
compared to 2004 was primarily due to the $1.0 million
increase in outside services and project materials and
$0.9 million increase in compensation expenses as a result
of hiring additional personnel to support new product
development initiatives, and an increase of $0.3 million in
depreciation.
The increase in research and development expenses for 2004
compared to 2003 was primarily due to the $1.5 million
increase in compensation expenses as a result of hiring
additional personnel and $1.0 million in project materials
to support existing products and new product development
initiatives including controllers for new flash memory types and
form factors as well as new flash products.
Sales and Marketing
The increase in sales and marketing expenses for 2005 compared
to 2004 was primarily due to an increase of $5.5 million in
compensation expenses due to increased headcount, increase in
occupancy costs of $0.5 million and increased travel and
entertainment costs of $0.5 million. These amounts were
partially offset by a decrease of $2.5 million in marketing
development fees, $1.4 million in commission costs, and
$1.9 million in advertising and tradeshow expenses.
The increase in sales and marketing expenses for 2004 compared
to 2003 was due to increased sales, which resulted in increases
of $12.8 million in freight and fulfillment expenses,
$7.8 million in market development expenses, and
$6.3 million in compensation expenses. The increase in
compensation expenses was due to both increased headcount and
increased variable selling expenses. In addition, there were
increases of $3.1 million in advertising expenses,
$2.3 million in promotional and other marketing costs,
$0.8 million in travel expenses, $0.4 million in
outside service expenses, and $0.4 million in project
materials and sample expenses.
General and Administrative
The increase in general and administrative expenses for 2005
compared to 2004 was primarily due to an increase of
$3.1 million in compensation expenses as a result of hiring
additional key personnel, $6.5 million in
increased legal fees, of which $0.9 million was in
settlement of a class action lawsuit and the remainder related
to our patent infringement litigation, $0.9 million in
increased accounting fees primarily as a result of costs
associated with regulatory requirements related to compliance
with the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 and audit costs.
The increase in general and administrative expenses in 2004
compared to 2003 was primarily due to an increase of
$5.9 million in legal expenses in connection with our
ongoing litigation and a $2.9 million increase in costs
associated with regulatory requirements related in part to
compliance with Section 404 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of
2002. The increase was also due to increases of
$0.5 million in compensation expenses, $0.5 million in
computer expenses, $0.4 million in outside service
expenses, $0.4 million in outside shareholder cost,
$0.4 million in insurance expense and $0.3 million in
travel expenses.
Income Taxes
The following table sets forth income tax data from our
consolidated statements of operations expressed as a percentage
of total net revenues (in thousands, except percent changes):
Income tax expense for 2005 relates primarily to foreign
withholding taxes of $3.8 related to license and royalty
payments and foreign withholding taxes of $1.8 million on a
payment received from a supplier. Income tax expense for 2004
includes $0.3 million related to federal and state income
taxes and $1.1 million in foreign income taxes (including
$0.2 million related to income derived from foreign license
revenue). Income tax expense for 2003 includes $2.5 million
related to state income taxes, which resulted primarily from the
State of California’s decision during the third quarter of
2002 to retroactively suspend the state income tax net operating
loss deduction for a two-year period, $1.0 million in
foreign income taxes and $0.7 million in federal
alternative minimum taxes.
At December 31, 2005, for federal, state, and foreign
income tax reporting purposes we had net operating loss carry
forwards of approximately $160 million, $104 million,
and $2 million, respectively, available to offset future
taxable income. At December 31, 2005, we had federal
research credits and state research credits of approximately
$2.5 million and $1.4 million, respectively, available
to offset future taxes. The federal operating loss and research
credit carry forwards will begin to expire in 2011 if not
utilized. The state operating loss carry forwards begin to
expire in 2006 if not utilized. The state research credits have
no expiration date. The foreign operating loss carry forward
will begin to expire in 2010, if not utilized.
The Tax Reform Act of 1986 limits the use of net operating loss
and tax credit carry forwards in certain situations where
changes occur in the stock ownership of a company. In the event
we have a change in ownership, as defined in the Tax Reform Act,
utilization of the carry forwards could be restricted.
Other Income and Expense
The following table sets forth other income and expense data
from our consolidated statements of operations:
In 2005, interest and other expense consisted primarily of
interest on our convertible notes payable ($3.4 million),
miscellaneous taxes and interest on short-term borrowings
($0.9 million). Interest and other expense for 2004
consisted primarily of interest on short-term borrowings
($0.4 million) and miscellaneous taxes.
Interest and other income for 2005 increased compared to 2004,
due to increased cash and cash equivalent balances resulting
primarily from the proceeds from the issuance of convertible
notes and higher interest rates.
Foreign exchange loss, net decreased $0.8 million to
$0.3 million in 2005 compared to $1.1 million in 2004.
These losses were primarily attributable to our sales activity
into European and Japanese markets, which exposed us to
fluctuations in foreign currencies including the British pound,
Euro and Japanese yen. During both 2005 and 2004 we entered into
designated foreign currency exchange forward contracts to
mitigate these exposures.
Fiscal 2004 Compared with Fiscal 2003
Interest and other expense for 2004 and 2003 consisted primarily
of interest on short-term borrowings and miscellaneous taxes.
The increase in interest and other expense for 2004 compared to
2003 was primarily due to higher bank debt and bank fees in 2004
compared to 2003.
Interest and other income for 2004 and 2003 consisted primarily
of interest on our cash balances and on short-term investments.
The increase in interest and other income for 2004 compared to
2003 was primarily due to higher average cash balances in 2004
compared to 2003.
The net foreign exchange loss for 2004 and 2003 was primarily
attributable to our sales activity into European and Japanese
markets, which exposed us to fluctuations in foreign currencies
including the British pound, Euro and Japanese yen against the
U.S. dollar in each of the periods. During both 2004 and
2003, we entered into designated foreign currency exchange
hedging contracts to mitigate these exposures.
Quarterly Results of Operations
The following table sets forth quarterly statements of
operations for the years ended December 31, 2005 and 2004,
respectively. This quarterly information has been derived from
our unaudited financial statements and, in the opinion of
management, includes all adjustments necessary for a fair
presentation of the information for the periods covered. The
quarterly data should be read in conjunction with our
consolidated financial statements and related notes. The
operating results for any quarter are not necessarily indicative
of the operating results for any future period.
In the quarter ended December 31, 2004, total net revenues,
cost of product revenues, gross margin, net loss and net loss
per basic and fully diluted share includes the
$63.6 million, $54.2 million, $9.4 million,
$8.6 million, and $0.11 respective negative impact of the
change in estimate related to certain customers previously
reported on a sell-in basis being reported on a sell-through
basis. In addition, the fourth quarter of 2004 cost of product
revenues includes inventory valuation adjustments of
$15.8 million.
2.
In the second quarter of 2005, cost of product revenues includes
a benefit of $10.8 million in connection with a one-time
negotiated cost settlement with a supplier.
3.
In the fourth quarter of 2004 and 2005 cost of product revenues
includes increases in inventory valuation reserves of
$12.5 million and $14.2 million, respectively.
Liquidity and Capital Resources
The following table is a summary of our cash flows from
operating, investing and financing activities:
Net cash (used in) provided by operating activities
$
(16,247
)
$
(115,750
)
$
58,820
Net cash used in investing activities
(2,095
)
(16,304
)
(614
)
Net cash provided by financing activities
86,655
43,515
84,046
The following table sets forth our days sales outstanding and
inventory turns per year:
2003
2004
2005
Days sales outstanding (net of change in deferred revenue)
40
49
38
Inventory turns per year
8
7
7
Net cash provided by operating activities for the year ended
December 31, 2005 included non-cash charges of
$41.1 million and a net decrease in operating asset and
liability accounts of $53.9 million. Non-cash charges were
comprised primarily of the $31.0 million provision to
record inventory at net realizable value where selling price
declines along with excess and obsolete inventories required
write-downs of our inventories. Other non-cash charges include
$4.7 million of depreciation and amortization,
$3.8 million in allowances for sales returns, discounts and
doubtful accounts, and $1.0 million loss on write-downs of
fixed assets. Changes in operating asset and liability accounts
for the period included a $61.1 million decrease in account
receivable, a $47.0 million decrease in accounts payable, a
$27.8 million decrease in inventories, a $4.6 million
increase in deferred license revenue and product margin, a
$3.3 million increase in accrued liabilities and a
$4.1 million decrease in prepaid expenses and other assets.
The decrease in accounts receivable, reflected in the decrease
in our day sales outstanding (“DSO”), was primarily
due to shorter than average payment terms associated with our
OEM sales and the payments received in the fourth quarter of
2005 in connection with license and royalty revenues. We
anticipate that DSO in 2006 will range between 40 to
50 days. The decrease in accounts payable was primarily due
to decreased receipts of inventory and the timing of payment for
such inventories in the fourth quarter of 2005 compared to the
fourth quarter of 2004. These same factors resulted in decreased
inventory levels at the end of 2005 compared with inventory
levels at the end of 2004. The increase in accrued liabilities
was due primarily to the increase in price protection, other
sales incentives and raw material purchase commitments, offset
by the decrease in accrued freight and fulfillment of
$4.4 million due to
improved cost structure and improved logistics management and
the decrease in accrued rebates payable of $3.0 million due
to improved rebate program management. The decrease in prepaid
expenses and other assets was primarily due to the timing of
settlement of value added tax receivables and lower prepayments
for inventory due to lower purchases of inventory.
Net cash used in operating activities for the year ended
December 31, 2004 included a net increase in operating
asset and liability accounts of $64.0 million, which was
partially offset by non-cash charges of $23.7 million
comprised of recording $17.4 million of inventory valuation
reserves primarily due to applying declining selling prices to
the relatively high levels of inventory held at the end of the
year, $3.2 million of increases in allowance for sales
returns, discounts and doubtful accounts, $2.4 million of
depreciation and amortization, $0.7 million of tax benefits
related to stock plans and amortization of short term investment
premium. Changes in working capital for the period included a
$91.5 million increase in inventory, a $82.3 million
increase in accounts receivable and a $6.7 million increase
in prepaid expenses and other assets. The increase in our
inventory was due primarily to the increased levels of inventory
required to satisfy demand for our products and the increase in
consigned inventory balances of $3.2 million at
December 31, 2004 compared to December 31, 2003. The
increase in accounts receivable was primarily due to increased
shipments of our products during 2004 and the increase in our
DSO from 40 days during 2003 to 49 days in 2004 due to
providing certain significant customers with 60 day payment
terms during 2004. The increase in prepaid expenses and other
assets was primarily due to deferred freight and fulfillment
costs, increased value added tax receivables and increased
prepayments made for inventory purchases and the increased
balance of value added tax prepayments due to increased
shipments to our European and Japanese subsidiaries. These
changes in working capital were offset by a $76.5 million
increase in accounts payable, a $30.1 million increase in
accrued liabilities and a $9.9 million increase in deferred
license revenue and product margin. The increase in accounts
payable was due primarily to significantly increased inventory
purchases in the fourth quarter of 2004 compared to the fourth
quarter of 2003. The increase in accrued liabilities was due
primarily to the increase in provisions for market development
funds of $6.7 million, legal fees of $5.1 million,
rebates of $11.7 million and freight and fulfillment costs
of $4.0 million. The increases in these provisions were
primarily the result of increased gross product revenues during
2004 compared to 2003. The increase in deferred license revenue
and product margin was primarily due to recording revenue from
all of our retail customers on a sell-through basis beginning in
the fourth quarter of 2004, compared to 2003 when revenue for
certain of our retail customers was recorded on a sell-to basis
as discussed in this report under the heading
“Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial
Condition and Results of Operations — Revenue
Recognition.”
Net cash used in operating activities for the year ended
December 31, 2003 included net increases in working capital
of $70.0 million, which were partially offset by non-cash
charges of $13.9 million. Changes in working capital for
the period included a $78.1 million increase in inventory,
a $51.7 million increase in accounts receivable, a
$15.4 million decrease in deferred license revenue and
product margin and a $3.6 million increase in prepaid
expenses and other assets. The increase in our inventory was due
primarily to the increased levels of inventory required to
satisfy demand for our products and the increase in consigned
inventory balances of $15.2 million at December 31,2003. The increase in accounts receivable was primarily due to
increased shipments of our products during 2003 and partially
offset by an improvement in our DSO. The decrease in deferred
license revenue and product margin was primarily due to
amortization of deferred license revenue related to our Samsung,
Sony and Olympus license agreements. The increase in prepaid
expenses and other assets was primarily due to increased
prepayments made for inventory purchases and the increased
balance of value added tax prepayments due to increased
shipments to our European and Japanese subsidiaries. These
changes in working capital were offset by a $58.1 million
increase in accounts payable and a $20.6 million increase
in accrued liabilities. The increase in accounts payable was due
primarily to increased inventory purchases in the fourth quarter
of 2003. The increase in accrued liabilities was due primarily
to the increase in provisions for market development funds of
$6.5 million, price protection of $6.0 million and
rebates of $2.5 million. The increases in these provisions
were primarily the result of increased gross product revenues
during 2003.
Net cash provided by investing activities for the year ended
December 31, 2005 was the result of selling
$9.7 million of short-term investments, which was offset by
purchases of $4.0 million in short-term
investments and $6.4 million of purchases of property and
equipment. Net cash used in investing activities for the year
ended December 31, 2004 was the result of purchases of
short-term investments of $25.9 million, which was
partially offset by proceeds from the sale and maturity of
short-term investments of $18.0 million. Net cash used in
investing activities for the years ended December 31, 2003
was the result of purchases of property and equipment.
Net cash provided by financing activities for the year ended
December 31, 2005 was the result of receiving
$66.3 million of net proceeds from the issuance of
convertible promissory notes and $3.6 million from
purchases under our employee stock purchase plan and the
exercise of stock options, and $14.7 million of net
borrowings under our credit facilities with Wells Fargo Bank and
Wells Fargo Foothill described below, including
$0.6 million of financing costs related to our bank credit
facility with Wells Fargo Foothill. Net cash provided by
financing activities for the year ended December 31, 2004
was primarily the result of drawing $40.0 million under our
credit facility with Wells Fargo as described below and net
proceeds of $3.1 million from stock option exercises and
sales under our employee stock purchase program. Net cash
provided by financing activities for the year ended
December 31, 2003 was primarily the result of raising
$90.1 million of net proceeds in September 2003 through the
sale of approximately 5.8 million shares of our common
stock at a price of $16.50 per share in a public offering
and $11.1 million from net proceeds from stock option
exercises, sales under our employee stock purchase program and
reduction of notes receivable from stockholders. These sources
of cash were partially offset by $14.6 million from the
repayment of notes payable under our credit facility. Restricted
cash represents cash and cash equivalents used to collateralize
standby letters of credit related to purchasing agreements with
our suppliers.
In April 2004, we entered into a credit agreement with Wells
Fargo Bank. Our credit agreement with Wells Fargo Bank enabled
us to borrow up to $40.0 million under a revolving line of
credit note, which we did on October 19, 2004.
Subsequently, on February 28, 2005, we entered into a
three-year asset based revolving credit facility arranged and
agented by Wells Fargo Foothill, with a maximum loan commitment
of $80.0 million. The actual amount available for borrowing
depends upon the value of our North American accounts receivable
base. On December 28, 2005, we borrowed $54.7 million
under this line of credit, and the annual interest rate for
borrowings under this line was 7.5%, determined using the
bank’s prime rate. This amount was repaid on
January 3, 2006.
Pursuant to the credit agreement with Wells Fargo Foothill, we
must comply with certain affirmative and negative covenants. The
affirmative covenants include a restriction on capital
expenditures of up to $3.5 million in any fiscal year and a
requirement that we report losses before interest, tax,
depreciation and amortization, commonly referred to as
“EBITDA,” of not more than a loss of
$22.5 million for the six months ended June 30, 2005,
a loss of not more than $18.2 million for the nine months
ended September 30, 2005, a loss of not more than
$4 million for the year ended December 31, 2005 and a
loss of not more than the loss in the immediately preceding
period for any trailing twelve month period thereafter. However,
as of December 31, 2005, we were not subject to the
foregoing affirmative covenants because our qualified cash under
the agreement was in excess of $40 million, and there were
no known financial covenant defaults under the agreement. We
were, however, in default of one of the financial reporting
affirmative covenants. Subsequent to December 31, 2005, we
provided the required financial reporting information and Wells
Fargo Foothill has waived the default. The negative covenants
with which we must comply include, among others, limitations on
indebtedness; liens; distribution or disposal of assets; changes
in the nature of our business; investments; mergers or
consolidations with or into third parties; restriction on
payment of dividends; transactions with affiliates; and
modifications to material agreements in a manner materially
adverse to the lender.
Upon the occurrence of an event of default, our obligations
under the credit facility may become immediately due and
payable. Events of default include, among others, our failure to
pay our obligations under the credit facility when due; our
failure to comply with any covenant set forth in the credit
agreement; the attachment or seizure of a material portion of
our assets; an insolvency proceeding is commenced by or against
us; we are restrained from conducting any material part of our
business; any judgment in excess of $250,000 is filed against us
and not released, discharged, bonded against or stayed pending
an appeal within 30 days; breach of any material warranty
in the credit agreement; breach or termination of a material
contract; or the
acceleration of, or default in connection with, any indebtedness
involving an aggregate amount of $250,000 or more.
On March 30, 2005, we issued $60 million in aggregate
principal amount of 5.625% senior convertible notes due
April 1, 2010 in a private offering (the
“Notes”). On May 27, 2005 we issued an additional
$10 million in aggregate principal amount of the Notes upon
the exercise by the purchasers of their option to purchase such
Notes under the same terms as the initial issuance. The Notes
are unsecured senior obligations, ranking equally in right of
payment with all of our existing and future unsecured senior
indebtedness, and senior in right of payment to any future
indebtedness that is expressly subordinated to the Notes. As a
result of these issuances, we received net proceeds of
$66.3 million.
The Notes are convertible into shares of our common stock any
time at the option of the holders of the Notes at a price equal
to approximately $6.68 per share, subject to adjustment in
certain circumstances, which represents a 30% premium over our
closing price of $5.14 on March 29, 2005. The indenture
governing the Notes (the “Indenture”) provides that no
holder of the Notes has the right to convert any portion of the
Notes to the extent that, after giving effect to such
conversion, such holder (together with such holder’s
affiliates) would beneficially own in excess of 4.99% of our
common stock outstanding immediately after giving effect to such
conversion. Interest on the Notes will be payable on
March 31 and September 30 of each year, beginning on
September 30, 2005.
The Notes are redeemable, in whole or in part, for cash at our
option beginning on April 1, 2008 at a redemption price
equal to the principal amount of the Notes being redeemed plus
accrued but unpaid interest, if any, up to but excluding the
redemption date; provided, however, that we may only exercise
such redemption right if our common stock has exceeded 175% of
the conversion price of the Notes for at least 20 trading days
in the 30 consecutive trading days ending on the trading day
prior to the date upon which we deliver the notice of
redemption. Upon redemption, we will be required to make a
payment equal to the net present value of the remaining
scheduled interest payments through April 1, 2010.
Upon the occurrence of a “fundamental change,” as
defined in the Indenture, the holders of the Notes will have:
•
the option to receive, if and only to the extent the holders
convert their Notes into our common stock, a make-whole premium
of additional shares of common stock equal to the approximate
lost option time value, if any, plus accrued but unpaid
interest, if any, up to but excluding the conversion
date; or
•
the right to require us to purchase for cash any or all of its
Notes at a repurchase price equal to the principal amount of the
Notes being repurchased plus accrued but unpaid interest, if
any, up to but excluding the repurchase date.
The conversion rate of the Notes will be subject to adjustment
upon the occurrence of certain events, including the following:
•
We declare certain dividends or distributions;
•
We effect a stock split or combination;
•
We offer certain rights or warrants to all or substantially all
our stockholders; and
•
We purchase shares of our common stock pursuant to a tender or
exchange offer under certain circumstances.
Upon the occurrence of an “event of default,” as
defined in the Indenture, the holders of at least 25% in
aggregate principal amount of the Notes or the trustee for the
Notes under the Indenture shall have the right to cause the
principal amount of the Notes to become due and payable
immediately. In the event of bankruptcy, insolvency or our
reorganization, the principal amount of the Notes shall
automatically become due and payable immediately.
On a change in control in which less then 90% of the
consideration consists of shares of capital stock or American
Depository Shares that are (A) listed on, or immediately
after the transaction or event will be listed
on, the New York Stock Exchange or the American Stock Exchange,
or (B) approved, or immediately after the transaction will
be approved, for quotation on the Nasdaq National Market or the
Nasdaq SmallCap Market and as result of such transaction or
transactions the Notes become convertible into or exchangeable
or exercisable for such publicly traded securities, the holders
of the Notes will be entitled to additional consideration (the
“Make-Whole Premium”) equal to the principal amount of
the note to be converted divided by $1,000 and multiplied by the
applicable number of shares of common stock ranging from
1.37 shares to 44.90 shares depending on the stock
price on the effective date of the change of control and the
effective date.
We currently believe that we have sufficient cash and
availability under our asset based credit facility to meet our
operating, capital and debt service requirements for at least
the next twelve months. There can be no assurance, however, that
we will be successful in executing our business plan, achieving
profitability or maintaining our existing customer base. Our
cash needs are also dependent on the credit terms extended to us
by our suppliers, particularly Samsung, which supplies the
majority of our flash memory, as well as other suppliers. If our
suppliers do not provide us with credit terms that are
appropriate to meet our needs, we may have to seek alternate
suppliers or additional financing. To the extent that we do not
generate sufficient revenues and reduce the cost of revenues or
reduce the cost of discretionary expenditures and, as a result,
cash, short term investments and available credit is
insufficient to satisfy liquidity requirements, additional cash
may be needed to finance operating and investing needs. However,
depending on market conditions, any additional financing needed
may not be available on acceptable terms, or at all.
Commitments
We purchase the majority of our flash memory from Samsung
pursuant to a supply agreement that has been extended through
March 24, 2011. Samsung has guaranteed a certain allocation
of its flash memory production capacity to us. Under the supply
agreement, our purchases are priced based on an agreed upon
methodology and Samsung provides us with intellectual property
indemnification for the products we purchase from them. Either
party can terminate the supply agreement in the event of the
other party’s breach of the agreement or bankruptcy. We are
not obligated to purchase minimum volumes of flash memory from
Samsung.
We also have a supply agreement with UMC under which we purchase
controllers. The purchase commitment for such controllers is
generally restricted to a forecasted time horizon based on a
rolling forecast of our anticipated purchase orders. This
agreement is in effect through December 2006. We have also
entered into a supply agreement with SMI, whereby SMI supplies
us with controllers for certain of our digital media products.
We are obligated to provide rolling forecasts to SMI and SMI has
agreed to maintain a buffer stock to meet our needs. SMI also
provides us with standard warranty and indemnity protections.
This agreement runs through September 2007 and may be terminated
by either party in the event of the other party’s
bankruptcy or breach of the agreement.
We depend on third party subcontractors for assembly and testing
of our digital media products. We do not have long-term
agreements with these subcontractors. Instead, we procure
services from these subcontractors on a per-order basis. These
third party subcontractors typically purchase certain components
to be used in the manufacture and assembly of our digital media
products. If we were to not use these components, these
subcontractors may claim that the cost of these products is our
responsibility.
The following table outlines our contractual obligations and
commercial commitments at December 31, 2005:
Payments due by period
Total amount
Less than
After
committed
1 Year
1-3 Years
3-5 Years
5 Years
(In thousands)
Contractual obligations and commercial commitments:
Short-term bank borrowings
$
54,723
$
54,723
$
—
$
—
$
—
Senior Convertible Notes
Principal
70,000
—
—
70,000
—
Interest
16,734
3,937
7,875
4,922
—
Open purchase orders with vendors and suppliers*
17,491
17,491
—
—
—
Operating leases
5,791
1,413
2,447
844
1,087
Standby letters of credit
5,000
5,000
—
—
—
Total contractual obligations and commercial commitments
$
169,739
$
82,564
$
10,322
$
75,766
$
1,087
*
At any given point in time, in the normal course of business, we
place cancelable purchase orders with our vendors and suppliers.
We enter into partnerships programs with companies for branded
products. As part of these programs, we may have royalty
programs based on sales, with targets in the agreements. If
these targets are not met, the recourse may be termination of
these programs, depending on the wording of the contract.
Off Balance Sheet Arrangements
We have no off-balance sheet arrangements other than operating
leases and unconditional purchase obligations as described
above. We, at times, have reimbursed partners for purchases made
on our behalf, where contemplated usage has not occurred. At
December 31, 2005, we have accrued $2.6 million for
such purchases. We may have additional liabilities for such
arrangements in the future.
Indemnifications
We are a party to a variety of agreements pursuant to which we
may be obligated to indemnify the other party with respect to
certain matters. Typically these obligations arise in connection
with sales contracts and license agreements under which we
customarily agree to hold the other party harmless against any
losses incurred as a result of a claim by any third party with
respect to our products. We also typically agree to pay any
costs incurred in defense of any such claim. The terms of the
indemnification obligations are generally perpetual from the
effective date of the agreement. In certain cases, there are
limits and exceptions to our potential liability for
indemnification relating to intellectual property infringement
claims. We cannot estimate the amount of potential future
payments, if any, that we might be required to make as a result
of these agreements. To date, the amounts required to defend
indemnification claims have been insignificant. Accordingly, we
have not accrued any amounts for these indemnification
obligations.
We have agreements whereby our directors and officers are
indemnified for certain events or occurrences while the officer
or director is serving at our request in such capacity. The
maximum amount of future payment we could be required to make
under these indemnification agreements is unlimited; however, we
have a directors’ and officers’ insurance policy that
reduces our exposure and enables us to recover a portion of any
future amounts paid. As a result of our insurance policy
coverage, we believe the estimated fair value of these
indemnification agreements is minimal. Accordingly, we did not
record any liabilities for these agreements.
We provide warranties that range from one year for digital music
players and the xD Picture Card to lifetime warranties for our
professional products. Warranty costs are the costs to rework or
scrap returned inventories. During the second quarter of 2005,
in collaboration with Canon, we identified a lost image
condition found to be rare and specific to select Canon cameras
when used with CompactFlash cards, including our own. To ensure
compatibility, we offered to rework our Professional 80x
CompactFlash cards and Canon offered a camera firmware update to
address issues experienced with other cards for customers who
experienced a problem with the identified Canon cameras. We and
Canon continue to work together to ensure compatibility across
product lines. The total estimated cost to rework the affected
products is expected to be approximately $0.9 million, all
of which was provided for in the second quarter of 2005.
Aggregate costs incurred to rework the affected products during
the second and third quarter of 2005 were approximately
$0.3 million. Prior to this event, warranty expenses were
not material.
Recent Accounting Developments
In December 2004, the FASB issued SFAS No. 123(R),
“Share-Based Payments”,
(“SFAS No. 123(R)”).
SFAS No. 123(R) requires employee stock options and
rights to purchase shares under stock participation plans to be
accounted for under the fair value method, and eliminates the
ability to account for these instruments under the intrinsic
value method prescribed by APB Opinion No. 25, and allowed
under the original provisions of SFAS No. 123.
SFAS No. 123(R) requires the use of an option pricing
model for estimating fair value, which is amortized to expense
over the service periods. The requirements of
SFAS No. 123(R) are effective for fiscal years
beginning after June 15, 2005. SFAS No. 123(R)
allows for either prospective recognition of compensation
expense or retrospective recognition, which may be back to the
original issuance of SFAS No. 123 or only to interim
periods in the year of adoption. In March 2005, the SEC issued
Staff Accounting Bulletin No. 107, “Share-Based
Payments,” (“SAB 107”). SAB 107
expresses views of the staff regarding the interaction between
SFAS No. 123(R) and certain SEC rules and regulations
and provides the staff’s views regarding the valuation of
share-based payment arrangements for public companies.
Management is currently evaluating the impact of adopting
SFAS No. 123(R). Based on options outstanding which
have been granted through December 31, 2005, we estimate
that additional compensation expense will range from
$5.0 million to $7.0 million in 2006 (in addition to
the expense recognition of the unamortized December 31,2005 stock-based compensation balance of $9.4 million) due
to the adoption of SFAS No. 123(R). This estimated
impact excludes the effect of any new options granted or
terminations taking place subsequent to December 31, 2005.
The overall impact on our consolidated financial statements will
be dependent on the option-pricing model used to compute fair
value and the inputs to that model such as volatility and
expected life. Accordingly, actual stock-based compensation
expense may differ materially from our current estimates.
In November 2005, the FASB issued FASB Staff Position
(“FSP”) Nos. FAS 115-1 and FAS 124-1,
“The Meaning of Other-Than-Temporary Impairment and Its
Application to Certain Investments,” which provides
guidance on determining when investments in certain debt and
equity securities are considered impaired, whether that
impairment is other-than-temporary, and the measurement of an
impairment loss. This FSP also includes accounting
considerations subsequent to the recognition of an
other-than-temporary impairment and requires certain disclosures
about unrealized losses that have not been recognized as
other-than-temporary impairments. The FSP is required to be
applied to reporting periods beginning after December 15,2005. We do not expect the adoption of this FSP in the first
quarter of 2006 will have a material impact on our consolidated
financial statements.
In June 2005, the FASB issued SFAS No. 154,
“Accounting Changes and Error Corrections: a Replacement of
Accounting Principles Board Opinion No. 20 and FASB
Statement No. 3” (“SFAS No. 154”).
SFAS No. 154 requires retrospective application for
voluntary changes in accounting principle unless it is
impracticable to do so. Retrospective application refers to the
application of a different accounting principle to previously
issued financial statements as if that principle had always been
used. SFAS No. 154’s retrospective application
requirement replaces APB No 20’s (“Accounting
Changes”) requirement to recognize most voluntary changes
in accounting principle by including in net income (loss) of
the period of the change the cumulative effect of changing to
the new accounting principle. SFAS No. 154 defines
retrospective application as the application of a different
accounting principle to prior accounting periods as if that
principle had always been used or as the adjustment of
previously issued financial statements to reflect a change in
the reporting entity. SFAS No. 154 also redefines
“restatement” as the revising of previously issued
financial statements to reflect the correction of an error. The
requirements of SFAS No. 154 are effective for
accounting changes made in fiscal years beginning after
December 15, 2005 and will only impact the consolidated
financial statements in periods in which a change in accounting
principle is made.
In December 2004, the FASB issued SFAS No. 153
(“SFAS No. 153”), “Exchanges of
Nonmonetary Assets — an amendment of Accounting
Principles Board Opinion No. 29” (“APB
No. 29” or the “Opinion”). The guidance in
APB No. 29, “Accounting for Nonmonetary
Transactions”, is based on the principle that gains or
losses on exchanges of nonmonetary assets may be recognized
based on the differences in the fair values of the assets
exchanged. The guidance in that Opinion, however, included
certain exceptions to that principle which allowed the asset
received to be recognized at the book value of the asset
surrendered. SFAS No. 153 amends APB No. 29 to
eliminate the exception for nonmonetary exchanges of similar
productive assets and replaces it with a general exception for
“exchanges of nonmonetary assets that do not have
commercial substance”. A nonmonetary exchange has
commercial substance if the future cash flows of the entity are
expected to change significantly as a result of the exchange.
The provisions of SFAS No. 153 should be applied
prospectively, and are effective for us for nonmonetary asset
exchanges occurring from the third quarter of 2005. Earlier
application is permitted for nonmonetary asset exchanges
occurring in our first quarter of 2005. The adoption of this
statement did not have a material impact on our consolidated
financial statements.
In March 2005, the FASB issued Interpretation No. 47,
“Accounting of Conditional Asset Retirement
Obligations” (“FIN 47”). FIN 47
clarifies that an entity must record a liability for a
“conditional” asset retirement obligation if the fair
value of the obligation can be reasonably estimated. FIN 47
also clarifies when an entity would have sufficient information
to reasonably estimate the fair value of an asset retirement
obligation. FIN 47 is effective no later than the end of
the first reporting period ending after December 15, 2005.
The adoption of FIN 47 in the fourth quarter of 2005 did
not have a material impact on our consolidated financial
statements.
In November 2004, the FASB issued SFAS No. 151,
“Inventory Costs — an amendment of Accounting
Research Bulletin (“ARB”) No. 43,
Chapter 4” (“ARB No. 43,
Chapter 4”). SFAS No. 151 amends the
guidance in ARB No. 43, Chapter 4, “Inventory
Pricing,” to clarify the accounting for abnormal amounts of
idle facility expense, freight, handling costs, and wasted
material (spoilage). Paragraph 5 of ARB No. 43,
Chapter 4 previously stated that “....under some
circumstances, items such as idle facility expense, excessive
spoilage, double freight, and rehandling costs may be so
abnormal as to require treatment as current period
charges....” SFAS No. 151 requires that those
items be recognized as current-period charges regardless of
whether they meet the criterion of “so abnormal.” In
addition, this Statement requires that allocation of fixed
production overheads to the costs of conversion be based on the
normal capacity of the production facilities.
SFAS No. 151 is effective for us for inventory costs
incurred beginning in 2006. The adoption of this statement did
not have a material impact on our consolidated financial
statements.
ITEM 7A
QUANTITATIVE AND QUALITATIVE DISCLOSURES ABOUT MARKET
RISK
Foreign Currency Risk. We sell our products primarily to
customers in the U.S. and, to a lesser extent, the Asia Pacific
region, Canada, Europe and Japan. Most of our sales are
currently denominated in U.S. dollars. Although the amount
of our sales denominated in currencies other than
U.S. dollars have declined during 2005, we anticipate an
increasing amount of our sales will be denominated in British
pounds, Canadian dollar, Euro, and the Japanese yen. Foreign
currency denominated revenues were approximately 28.3% and 17.4%
of our total product revenues for the years ended
December 31, 2004 and December 31, 2005, respectively.
We purchase our products and the materials and services to build
our products primarily from vendors in Korea, Taiwan, Indonesia,
China, the United States, the United Kingdom, Germany, Japan and
Singapore. Most of these costs are currently denominated in
U.S. dollars. Although the amount of our product costs
denominated in currencies other than U.S. dollars has
declined during 2005, we anticipate an
increasing amount of our costs could be denominated in the Euro,
Japanese yen, pound sterling and possibly other currencies.
Foreign currency denominated costs were approximately 6.4% and
2.4% of our cost of product revenues for the years ended
December 31, 2004 and December 31, 2005, respectively.
As a result, it is possible that our future financial results
could be directly affected by changes in foreign currency
exchange rates, and the prices of our products would become more
expensive in a particular foreign market if the value of the
U.S. dollar rises in comparison to the local currency,
which may make it more difficult to sell our products in that
market. Conversely, the prices of our products would become less
expensive in a particular foreign market if the value of the
U.S. dollar falls in comparison to the local currency,
which may make it easier to sell our products in that market. We
will continue to face foreign currency exchange risk in the
future. Therefore, our financial results could be directly
affected by weak economic conditions in foreign markets. These
risks could become more significant as we expand business
outside the U.S. or if we increase sales in
non-U.S. dollar
denominated currencies.
We have adopted and implemented a hedging policy to mitigate
these potential risks. We use forward contracts to mitigate the
exposures associated with certain net foreign currency asset or
liability positions. However, we cannot assure you that any
policies or techniques that we have implemented, or may
implement in the future, will be successful or that our business
and financial condition will not be harmed by exchange rate
fluctuations. We do not enter into derivative financial
instruments for speculative or trading purposes. During 2005, we
entered into hedges on intercompany payables denominated in the
British pound and Japanese yen. During 2005, the foreign
currency exposures on our net asset and liability positions were
not fully hedged. For the year ended December 31, 2004,
gain on our foreign currency net asset and liability positions
was $4.1 million, which was offset by net losses on hedging
transactions of $5.1 million. For the year ended
December 31, 2005, losses on our foreign currency net asset
and liability positions were $5.4 million and were offset
by gains on hedging transactions of $5.1 million. As of
December 31, 2005, we held forward contracts with an
aggregate notional value of $40.5 million to hedge the
risks associated with forecast British pound and Japanese yen
denominated assets and liabilities. At December 31, 2005,
our aggregate exposure to
non-U.S. dollar
currencies, net of currency hedge contracts, was approximately
$30.0 million. If, at December 31, 2005, we applied an
immediate 10% adverse move in the levels of foreign currency
exchange rates relative to these exposures, we would incur a
foreign exchange loss of approximately $3.0 million.
Interest Rate Risk. Our exposure to market risk for
changes in interest rates relates primarily to the increase or
decrease in the amount of interest income we earn on our
investments and the amount of interest expense we pay on
borrowings under our line of credit and senior convertible
notes. The risk associated with fluctuating interest rates
impacts all of our investments because of the short duration of
the investments and our borrowings under our line of credit.
Accordingly, our interest rate risk is primarily related to our
short-term investments, which amounted to $2.0 million at
December 31, 2005. Our interest rate risk is related only
to our $54.7 million of borrowings under our line of credit
facility with Wells Fargo Foothill at December 31, 2005. We
do not plan to use derivative financial instruments in our
investment portfolio. We plan to ensure the safety and
preservation of our invested principal funds by limiting default
risk and market risk. We plan to mitigate default risk by
investing in investment-grade securities. We have historically
invested in investment-grade, short-term securities that we have
held until maturity to limit our market risk.
All of the potential changes noted above are based on
sensitivity analysis performed on our financial position at
December 31, 2005. Actual results may differ materially.
The following financial statement schedule is filed as part of
this report and should be read in conjunction with the
consolidated financial statements:
Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm
To the Board of Directors and Stockholders
of Lexar Media, Inc.:
We have completed integrated audits of Lexar Media, Inc.’s
2005 and 2004 consolidated financial statements and of its
internal control over financial reporting as of
December 31, 2005, and an audit of its 2003 consolidated
financial statements in accordance with the standards of the
Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Our
opinions, based on our audits, are presented below.
Consolidated financial statements and financial statement
schedule
In our opinion, the consolidated financial statements listed in
the accompanying index present fairly, in all material respects,
the financial position of Lexar Media, Inc. and its subsidiaries
at December 31, 2005 and 2004, and the results of their
operations and their cash flows for each of the three years in
the period ended December 31, 2005 in conformity with
accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of
America. In addition, in our opinion, the financial statement
schedule listed in the accompanying index presents fairly, in
all material respects, the information set forth therein when
read in conjunction with the related consolidated financial
statements. These financial statements and financial statement
schedule are the responsibility of the Company’s
management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these
financial statements and financial statement schedule based on
our audits. We conducted our audits of these statements in
accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting
Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we
plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about
whether the financial statements are free of material
misstatement. An audit of financial statements includes
examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and
disclosures in the financial statements, assessing the
accounting principles used and significant estimates made by
management, and evaluating the overall financial statement
presentation. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable
basis for our opinion.
Internal control over financial reporting
Also, we have audited management’s assessment, included in
Management’s Report on Internal Control Over Financial
Reporting appearing under Item 9A, that the Company did not
maintain effective internal control over financial reporting as
of December 31, 2005, because the Company did not maintain
effective controls: (i) to ensure revenue and deferred
revenue were accurately recorded in accordance with generally
accepted accounting principles or (ii) over the existence
and valuation of inventory, based on criteria established in
Internal Control — Integrated Framework issued
by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway
Commission (COSO). The Company’s management is responsible
for maintaining effective internal control over financial
reporting and for its assessment of the effectiveness of
internal control over financial reporting. Our responsibility is
to express opinions on management’s assessment and on the
effectiveness of the Company’s internal control over
financial reporting based on our audit.
We conducted our audit of internal control over financial
reporting in accordance with the standards of the Public Company
Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards
require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable
assurance about whether effective internal control over
financial reporting was maintained in all material respects. An
audit of internal control over financial reporting includes
obtaining an understanding of internal control over financial
reporting, evaluating management’s assessment, testing and
evaluating the design and operating effectiveness of internal
control, and performing such other procedures as we consider
necessary in the circumstances. We believe that our audit
provides a reasonable basis for our opinions.
A company’s internal control over financial reporting is a
process designed to provide reasonable assurance regarding the
reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of
financial statements for external purposes in accordance with
generally accepted accounting principles. A company’s
internal control over financial reporting includes those
policies and procedures that (i) pertain to the maintenance
of records that, in reasonable detail, accurately and fairly
reflect the transactions and dispositions of the assets of the
company; (ii) provide reasonable assurance that
transactions are recorded as necessary to permit preparation
of financial statements in accordance with generally accepted
accounting principles, and that receipts and expenditures of the
company are being made only in accordance with authorizations of
management and directors of the company; and (iii) provide
reasonable assurance regarding prevention or timely detection of
unauthorized acquisition, use, or disposition of the
company’s assets that could have a material effect on the
financial statements.
Because of its inherent limitations, internal control over
financial reporting may not prevent or detect misstatements.
Also, projections of any evaluation of effectiveness to future
periods are subject to the risk that controls may become
inadequate because of changes in conditions, or that the degree
of compliance with the policies or procedures may deteriorate.
A material weakness is a control deficiency, or combination of
control deficiencies, that results in more than a remote
likelihood that a material misstatement of the annual or interim
financial statements will not be prevented or detected. The
following material weaknesses have been identified and included
in management’s assessment at December 31, 2005.
•
Revenue recognition.The Company did not maintain
effective controls to ensure revenue and deferred revenue were
accurately recorded in accordance with generally accepted
accounting principles. Specifically, the Company did not
maintain effective controls to accurately: (i) account for
all price reductions and promotional commitments, including
rebate programs offered to customers; (ii) record deferred
revenue based on actual sales price and inventory movements;
(iii) record revenue and inventory adjustments for returns
of product by customers; and (iv) record concessions
provided to certain customers as a reduction of revenue.
•
Accounting for Inventory.The Company did not maintain
effective controls over the existence and valuation of
inventory. Specifically, the Company did not maintain effective
controls to: (i) accurately track, confirm and reconcile
inventory movements to ensure the timely recognition of cost of
product revenues; (ii) ensure the existence of inventory
and the appropriate valuation of returned inventory;
(iii) identify and accurately adjust inventory for excess
and slow moving products or components and record necessary
write-downs of inventory to lower of cost or market; and
(iv) accurately accrue for the obligations to purchase
inventory at costs in excess of net realizable value.
These control deficiencies resulted in audit adjustments to
revenues, accounts receivable, cost of product revenues,
deferred revenue, sales related accruals, inventory and
inventory valuation reserves and related accruals in the
Company’s 2005 consolidated financial statements.
Additionally, these control deficiencies could result in the
misstatement of the aforementioned accounts that would result in
a material misstatement to the Company’s annual or interim
consolidated financial statements that would not be prevented or
detected. Accordingly, management has determined that these
control deficiencies constitute material weaknesses.
These material weaknesses were considered in determining the
nature, timing, and extent of audit tests applied in our audit
of the 2005 consolidated financial statements, and our opinion
regarding the effectiveness of the Company’s internal
control over financial reporting does not affect our opinion on
those consolidated financial statements.
In our opinion, management’s assessment that Lexar Media,
Inc. did not maintain effective internal control over financial
reporting as of December 31, 2005 is fairly stated, in all
material respects, based on criteria established in Internal
Control — Integrated Framework issued by the COSO.
Also, in our opinion, because of the effects of the material
weaknesses described above on the achievement of the objectives
of the control criteria, Lexar Media, Inc. has not maintained
effective internal control over financial reporting as of
December 31, 2005, based on criteria established in
Internal Control — Integrated Framework issued
by the COSO.
Adjustments to reconcile net income (loss) to net cash provided
by (used in) operating activities:
Depreciation and amortization
1,543
2,415
4,706
Loss on write-downs of fixed assets
—
42
1,027
Allowances for sales returns, discounts and doubtful accounts
4,695
3,187
3,773
Provisions to record inventories at net realizable value
4,063
17,431
30,955
Tax benefit from stock option and employee stock purchase plans
3,080
561
—
Amortization of stock-based compensation
497
—
(56
)
Amortization of deferred financing costs and other
—
110
728
Change in operating assets and liabilities:
Accounts receivable
(51,665
)
(82,289
)
61,063
Inventories
(78,079
)
(91,512
)
27,783
Prepaid expenses and other assets
(3,593
)
(6,688
)
4,067
Accounts payable
58,111
76,542
(46,974
)
Accrued liabilities
20,597
30,093
3,299
Deferred license revenue and product margin
(15,359
)
9,888
4,637
Other non-current liabilities
(49
)
—
—
Net cash (used in) provided by operating activities
(16,247
)
(115,750
)
58,820
Cash flows from investing activities:
Purchase of property and equipment
(2,095
)
(8,443
)
(6,352
)
Proceeds from sale and maturity of short-term investments
—
18,049
9,738
Purchase of short-term investments
—
(25,910
)
(4,000
)
Net cash used in investing activities
(2,095
)
(16,304
)
(614
)
Cash flows from financing activities:
Proceeds from public offering net of issuance costs
90,095
—
—
Issuance of stock under employee stock purchase plan
777
1,198
1,835
Repayment of notes receivable from stockholders
589
412
—
Exercise of stock options and warrants
9,762
1,905
1,814
Proceeds from senior convertible notes payable net of issuance
costs
—
—
66,254
Repayment of bank borrowings
(14,568
)
—
(40,000
)
Proceeds from bank borrowings, net of issuance costs
—
40,000
54,143
Net cash provided by financing activities
86,655
43,515
84,046
Net effect of exchange rates on cash and cash equivalents
2
546
(639
)
Net increase (decrease) in cash and cash equivalents
68,315
(87,993
)
141,613
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year
47,383
115,698
27,705
Cash and cash equivalents at end of year
$
115,698
$
27,705
$
169,318
Supplemental disclosure of cash flow information:
Interest paid
$
160
$
281
$
3,535
Income taxes paid
709
1,313
4,945
Supplemental disclosure of non-cash financing and investing
activities:
Issuance of 768,686 shares of common stock in 2003 upon net
exercise of 1,093,580 warrants at exercise price ranging from
$1.00 to $8.00 per share (weighted average exercise price
of $4.08 per share)
$
—
$
—
$
—
The accompanying notes are an integral part of these
consolidated financial statements.
Lexar Media, Inc. (together with its subsidiaries, the Company)
was incorporated in the state of Delaware and its common stock
is traded on the Nasdaq National Market under the symbol LEXR.
The Company designs, develops, manufactures and markets
high-performance digital media, as well as other flash based
storage products for consumer and professional markets that
utilize digital media for the capture and retrieval of digital
content for the digital photography, consumer electronics,
computer, industrial and communications markets. Its digital
media products include a variety of flash memory cards with a
range of speeds, capacities and special features to satisfy the
various demands of different users of flash cards. To address
the growing market for compact digital data and media storage
solutions, its digital media products also include its JumpDrive
products, which are high-speed, portable USB flash drives for
consumer applications that serve a variety of uses, including
floppy disk replacement. In addition, the Company markets and
sells controllers and other components to other manufacturers of
flash storage media as well as digital media accessories and a
variety of connectivity products that link its media products to
PCs and other electronic host devices. The Company also licenses
its technology to certain third parties.
Many of the CompactFlash, Memory Stick and JumpDrive products
that the Company manufactures incorporate its patented
controller technology. Other flash cards, including the Secure
Digital Card and some of its JumpDrive products, incorporate
third party controllers that the Company purchases and combines
with flash memory from its suppliers, which are then assembled
into a flash card by its manufacturing partners. A third
category of products, including the xD Picture Card, are
products that the Company does not currently manufacture, but
purchases and resells.
A flash memory controller determines, among other things, the
manner in which data is written to, and read from, the flash
memory and is important in determining the overall performance
of the flash card. The Company’s flash memory controller
technology can be applied to a variety of consumer electronic
applications, such as digital music players, laptop computers,
personal digital assistants, telecommunication and network
devices and digital video recorders. In order to extend its
technology into these markets, the Company has selectively
licensed its product and technology to third parties in business
sectors such as data communications, telecommunications,
industrial, computing and embedded markets.
The Company sells its digital media and connectivity products to
end-users primarily through mass market, photo and OEM channels.
The mass-market channel includes national, international and
regional retailers and select corporate accounts. The Company
also uses a direct sales force, as well as distributors,
value-added resellers and independent sales representatives, and
its website, www.lexar.com.The Company currently sells
its products in the United States, Europe, Asia and other parts
of the world, either directly, through its wholly owned
subsidiaries located in Japan and the U.K., or through
international distributors.
The Companycontracts with an independent foundry and assembly
and testing organizations to manufacture its flash card
products. This allows the Company to focus on its design
efforts, minimize fixed costs and capital expenditures and gain
access to advanced manufacturing capabilities.
In August 2000, the Company completed its initial public
offering, raising net proceeds of $53.3 million. In
December 2002 and again in September 2003, the Company completed
public offerings, raising net proceeds of $27.7 million and
$90.1 million, respectively. In April and May, the Company
raised net proceeds of $66.3 million from issuing senior
notes convertible into its common stock.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS —
(Continued)
NOTE 2 — SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING
POLICIES:
Financial Statement Presentation
The consolidated financial statements of the Company include its
accounts and the accounts of its wholly owned subsidiaries. All
significant intercompany balances and transactions have been
eliminated. Certain amounts in the prior years’ financial
statements have been reclassified to conform to the 2005
presentation. Such reclassifications had no effect on its
consolidated statements of operations or stockholders’
equity.
Foreign Currency Translation
The Company considers the local currency to be the functional
currency for its international subsidiaries. Assets and
liabilities denominated in foreign currencies are translated
using the exchange rate on the balance sheet date. Revenues and
expenses are translated at average exchange rates prevailing
during the year. Translation adjustments resulting from this
process are charged or credited to accumulated other
comprehensive loss. Foreign currency transaction gains and
losses are included in the consolidated statements of operations.
Use of Estimates
The preparation of financial statements in conformity with
generally accepted accounting principles requires management to
make estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amount
of assets and liabilities and disclosure of contingent assets
and liabilities at the date of the financial statements and the
reported amounts of revenues and expenses during the reporting
period. On an ongoing basis, the Company evaluates its
estimates, including those related to unsold inventories by
certain nonreporting distributors and resellers, price
protection, customer programs and incentives, product returns,
doubtful accounts, inventory valuation reserves, warranty
expenses, investments, intangible assets, income taxes and
related valuation allowances, contingencies and litigation. The
Company bases its estimates on historical experience and on
various other assumptions that the Company believes to be
reasonable under the circumstances, the results of which form
the basis for making judgments about the carrying values of
assets and liabilities and reported amounts of revenue and
expenses that are not readily apparent from other sources.
Actual results may differ materially from these estimates under
different assumptions or conditions.
Estimates and assumptions about future events and their effects
cannot be determined with certainty. These estimates and
assumptions may change as new events occur, as additional
information is obtained and as the Company’s operating
environment changes. These changes are included in the
consolidated financial statements as soon as they become known.
Differences between amounts initially recognized and amounts
subsequently determined as an adjustment to those amounts are
recognized in the period such adjustment is determined as a
change in accounting estimate.
Cash and Cash Equivalents
The Company considers all highly liquid investments purchased
with an original maturity of three months or less to be cash
equivalents.
Restricted Cash
Restricted cash represents cash and cash equivalents used to
collateralize standby letters of credit related to purchasing
agreements with the Company’s suppliers. Cash restricted
under standby letters of credit amounted to $5.0 million at
both December 31, 2004, and 2005.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS —
(Continued)
Short-Term Investments
Short-term investments consist of taxable commercial paper,
U.S. government agency obligations, and corporate and
municipal notes and bonds with high-credit quality ratings.
The Company classifies its entire investment portfolio as
available-for-sale at the time of purchase and periodically
reevaluates such designation. Debt securities classified as
available-for-sale are reported at fair value. Unrecognized
gains or losses on available-for-sale securities are included in
equity until their disposition. As of December 31, 2005,
the amount of unrecognized gain related to the Company’s
available-for-sale investment portfolio was approximately
$8,000. If realized gains and losses and declines in value are
judged by management to be other than temporary on
available-for-sale securities, then the cost basis of the
security is written down to fair value and the amount of the
write-down is included in current net income (loss). The cost of
securities sold is based on the specific identification method.
Fair value of available-for-sale securities is based upon quoted
market prices. Gross realized gains and losses on sales of
available-for-sale securities were immaterial for the years
ended December 31, 2003, 2004 and 2005.
The Company’s short-term investments at December 31,2005 consisted of highly liquid corporate debt securities of
approximately $1.0 million and U.S. auction rate
government obligations of approximately $1.0 million. The
Company’s short-term investments at December 31, 2004
included U.S. government obligations of approximately
$4.0 million and corporate debt securities of approximately
$3.7 million.
Concentration of Risk
Financial instruments that potentially subject the Company to
concentration of credit risk consist principally of cash, cash
equivalents, short-term investments and accounts receivable. The
Company’s cash and cash equivalents are maintained at
leading U.S., European and Japanese financial institutions.
Deposits in these institutions may exceed the amount of
insurance provided on these deposits.
The Company’s accounts receivable are derived from revenues
earned from customers located primarily in the U.S., Europe,
Canada, Asia and Japan. The Company performs credit evaluations
of its customers’ financial condition and, generally,
requires no collateral from its customers. The Company maintains
an allowance for doubtful accounts based upon the expected
collectibility of accounts receivable. One customer accounted
for 20% of accounts receivable at December 31, 2004. Two
customers accounted for 24% and 11% of accounts receivable at
December 31, 2005. Revenues from two customers represented
12% and 11% of the Company’s gross revenues for the year
ended December 31, 2003. Revenues from one customer
represented 16% of the Company’s gross revenues for the
year ended December 31, 2004. Revenues from one customer
represented 20% of the Company’s gross revenues for the
year ended December 31, 2005.
Certain components necessary for the manufacture of the
Company’s products are obtained from a sole supplier or a
limited group of suppliers.
The Company operates in an industry characterized by intense
competition, supply shortages or oversupply, rapid technological
change, evolving industry standards, declining average prices
and rapid product obsolescence.
Fair Value of Financial Instruments
Carrying amounts of certain of the Company’s financial
instruments, including cash equivalents, short-term investments,
forward currency contracts, accounts receivable, accounts
payable and short term bank borrowings, approximate fair value
due to their short maturities.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS —
(Continued)
Inventories
Inventories are stated at the lower of cost or market. Cost is
determined using standard costs that approximate actual cost
under the first-in,
first-out method. Appropriate allowances are made to reduce the
value of inventories to net realizable value where this is below
cost. This may occur where the Company determines that
inventories may be slow moving, obsolete or excess or where the
selling price of the product is expected to be insufficient to
cover product costs and selling expenses. Allowances, once
established, are not reversed until the related inventory has
been sold or scrapped.
Property and Equipment
Property and equipment are stated at cost. Depreciation and
amortization is computed using the straight-line basis over the
estimated useful lives of the assets, generally 1 to
5 years, as follows:
Useful Life
Computer and other equipment
1-3 years
Engineering equipment
5 years
Software
3 years
Furniture, fixtures and improvements
5 years
Depreciation expense related to the Company’s property and
equipment was $1.4 million in 2003, $2.3 million in
2004, and $4.1 million in 2005.
In 2005, the Company wrote-off $827,000 in obsolete tooling
equipment and changed the estimated useful life of the remaining
tooling equipment from three years to two years resulting in an
additional amortization expense of $485,000 in 2005.
Leasehold improvements are amortized over the shorter of the
lease term or the estimated useful lives of the related assets.
Costs for internal use software are accumulated over the time it
takes to develop the software and depreciation begins upon the
first production use of the software.
Software Development Costs
Costs incurred in the research, design and development of
products are expensed as incurred until technological
feasibility has been established. To date, the establishment of
technological feasibility of the Company’s products and
general release substantially coincided. As a result, the
Company has not capitalized any software development costs since
such costs have not been significant.
Revenue Recognition
Product Revenues
The Company derives revenues from sales of its digital media
products, which are comprised of flash memory devices, through
its retail channels and from sales of digital media accessories
and other components through the Company’s OEM channel. The
Company sells its products to distributors, retailers, OEMs and
end users. The Company uses significant management judgments and
estimates in connection with the revenue recognized in any
accounting period.
The Company’s policy is to recognize revenue from sales to
its customers when the rights and risks of ownership have passed
to the customers, when persuasive evidence of an arrangement
exists, the product has been delivered, the price is fixed or
determinable and collection of the resulting receivable is
reasonably assured.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS —
(Continued)
With respect to sales to OEMs and end users, the Company does
not grant return rights, price protection or other sales
incentives. Accordingly, the Company recognizes product revenue
upon delivery if the Company’s revenue recognition criteria
described above are met.
With respect to sales to distributors and retailers
(collectively referred to herein as “resellers”), the
Company grants significant return rights, price protection and
pricing adjustments subsequent to initial product shipment.
Prior to the fourth quarter of 2004, for resellers where the
Company was able to reasonably estimate the level of product
returns and sales incentives, the Company recognized revenue
upon shipment (“ship-to” basis) and, at the time
revenue was recorded, the Company recorded estimated reductions
to product revenue based upon its customer sales incentive
programs and the historical experience of the product returns,
and the impact of the special pricing agreements, price
protection, promotions and other volume-based incentives. In
order to make such estimates, the Company analyzed historical
returns, current economic conditions, customer demand and other
relevant specific customer information. For resellers where the
Company was unable to reasonably estimate the level of product
returns or other revenue allowances, revenue and cost of product
revenues were deferred until these resellers either sold the
product to their customers or a time period that is reasonably
estimated to allow these resellers to sell the product to their
customers had elapsed. Starting in the fourth quarter of 2004,
the Company determined that due to the high volatility of prices
in the retail market during the period, the Company was no
longer able to reasonably estimate the level of revenue
allowances and product returns, and accordingly, the Company
became unable to determine the selling price of its product at
the time the sale took place. As a result, effective
October 1, 2004, for all its resellers, revenue and cost of
product revenues are deferred until these resellers either sell
the product to their customers or a time period that is
reasonably estimated to allow these resellers to sell the
product to their customers has elapsed. At no point does the
Company recognize revenues or cost of product revenues while
deferring product margin.
The Company records estimated reductions to revenue for customer
and distributor incentive programs and offerings, including
price protection, promotions, co-op advertising, and other
volume-based incentives and expected returns. Additionally, the
Company has incentive programs or rebates that require it to
estimate, based on historical experience, the number of
customers who will actually redeem the incentive. Marketing
development programs are either recorded as a reduction to
revenue or as an addition to marketing expense in compliance
with the consensus reached by the Emerging Issues Task Force, or
EITF, of the Financial Standards Accounting Board, or FASB, on
issue 01-09.
License and Royalty Revenues
The Company recognizes revenue when it has a signed license
agreement, the technology has been delivered, there are no
remaining significant obligations under the contract, the fee is
fixed or determinable and non-refundable and collectibility is
reasonably assured. If the Company agrees to provide support to
the licensee under the agreement it recognizes license fees
ratably over the period during which support is expected to be
provided independent of the payment schedule under the license
agreement. When royalties are based on the volume of products
sold that incorporate the Company’s technology, revenue is
recognized in the period license sales are reported.
The Company actively enforces its patented technologies and
aggressively pursues third parties that are utilizing its
intellectual property without a license or who have
under-reported the amount of royalties owed under license
agreement with it. As a result of such activities, from time to
time, the Company may recognize royalty revenues that relate to
infringements that occurred in prior periods. These royalty
revenues may cause revenues to be higher than expected during a
particular reporting period and may not occur in subsequent
periods. Differences between amounts initially recognized and
amounts subsequently determined as an adjustment to those
amounts are recognized in the period such adjustment is
determined as a change in accounting estimate.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS —
(Continued)
Research and Development
Research and development costs are charged to operations as
incurred.
Accounting for Stock-based Compensation
The Company accounts for employee stock-based compensation
arrangements in accordance with the provisions of Accounting
Principles Board Opinion (“APB”) No. 25,
“Accounting for Stock Issued to Employees,” Financial
Accounting Standards Board Interpretation (“FIN”)
No. 44, “Accounting for Certain Transactions Involving
Stock Compensation, an Interpretation of APB Opinion
No. 25” and FIN No. 28, “Accounting for
Stock Appreciation Rights and Other Variable Stock Option or
Award Plans,” and comply with the disclosure provisions of
Statement of Financial Accounting Standards (“SFAS”)
No. 123, “Accounting for Stock-Based
Compensation,” and SFAS No. 148, “Accounting
for Stock Based Compensation — Transition and
Disclosure.” Under APB No. 25, compensation expense is
based on the difference, if any, between the estimated fair
value of its common stock on the date of grant and the exercise
price. SFAS No. 123 defines a “fair value”
based method of accounting for an employee stock option or
similar equity instrument.
The Company accounts for equity instruments issued to
non-employees in accordance with the provisions of
SFAS No. 123 and Emerging Issues Task Force
(“EITF”) 96-18, “Accounting for Equity
Instruments that are Issued to Other Than Employees for
Acquiring, or in Conjunction with Selling, Goods or
Services” and values awards using the Black Scholes option
pricing model as of the date at which the non-employees
performance is complete. The Company recognizes the fair value
of the award as a compensation expense as the non-employees
interest in the instrument vests.
Pro forma information regarding net income (loss) per share as
if its stock options, employee stock purchase plan and the
restricted stock issuances had been determined based on the fair
value as of the grant date consistent with the provisions of
SFAS No. 123 and SFAS No. 148, are as
follows (in thousands, except per share amounts):
Add: Compensation expense included in reported net income, net
of taxes
497
—
—
Less: Pro forma compensation expense determined under the fair
value method, net of taxes
(15,376
)
(25,191
)
(26,294
)
Pro forma net income (loss)
$
25,033
$
(100,721
)
$
(62,482
)
Net income (loss) per common share — basic as reported
$
0.57
$
(0.96
)
$
(0.45
)
Net income (loss) per common share — basic pro forma
$
0.35
$
(1.28
)
$
(0.78
)
Net income (loss) per common share — diluted as
reported
$
0.49
$
(0.96
)
$
(0.45
)
Net income (loss) per common share — diluted pro forma
$
0.31
$
(1.28
)
$
(0.78
)
In December 2004, the FASB issued SFAS No. 123(R),
“Share-Based Payments”,
(“SFAS No. 123(R)”).
SFAS No. 123(R) requires employee stock options and
rights to purchase shares under stock participation plans to be
accounted for under the fair value method, and eliminates the
ability to account for these instruments under the intrinsic
value method prescribed by APB Opinion No. 25, and allowed
under the original provisions of SFAS No. 123.
SFAS No. 123(R) requires the use of an option
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS —
(Continued)
pricing model for estimating fair value, which is amortized to
expense over the service periods. The requirements of
SFAS No. 123(R) are effective for fiscal years
beginning after June 15, 2005. SFAS No. 123(R)
allows for either prospective recognition of compensation
expense or retrospective recognition, which may be back to the
original issuance of SFAS No. 123 or only to interim
periods in the year of adoption. In March 2005, the SEC issued
Staff Accounting Bulletin No. 107, “Share-Based
Payments,” (“SAB 107”). SAB 107
expresses views of the SEC staff regarding the interaction
between SFAS No. 123(R) and certain SEC rules and
regulations and provides the SEC staff’s views regarding
the valuation of share-based payment arrangements for public
companies.
On December 7, 2005, the Board of Directors of the Company
approved the acceleration of the vesting of unvested stock
options outstanding as of December 7, 2005 with an exercise
price equal to or greater than $9.50 per share which were
held by the Company’s employees, including officers and
employee directors. As a result of the Board’s action,
these unvested stock options became fully vested and exercisable
effective as of December 7, 2005, rather than becoming
exercisable at the later dates when such options would have
otherwise vested in the normal course. The Company’s stock
options have generally vested over a four-year period.
In order to preserve the long-term incentive characteristic of
these stock options, the Company has imposed certain sale
restrictions on the shares underlying these accelerated options.
Specifically, the option holder may not sell, transfer, encumber
or reduce economic risk through “hedging” or similar
arrangements with respect to any shares acquired upon the
exercise of an accelerated option until on or after the date
such options would have otherwise vested in the normal course.
The intent of these selling restrictions is to restrict the
option holders’ ability to sell shares except in a manner
consistent with the standard schedule under which the
Company’s stock options have customarily vested.
The decision to accelerate the vesting of these stock options
was made primarily to reduce compensation expense that otherwise
would be recorded in future periods following the Company’s
adoption in the first quarter of 2006 of
SFAS No. 123(R). Starting January 1, 2006, the
Company must recognize compensation expense over the applicable
vesting period related to awards that are granted on or after
January 1, 2006, and related to the unvested portion of
awards granted prior to January 1, 2006. Additionally, the
Company believes this decision to accelerate the vesting of
these stock options further enhances the Company’s focus on
stockholder return and is in the best interest of the
Company’s stockholders. The pro forma compensation expense
for the year ended December 31, 2005, includes
$8.3 million related to the acceleration of the vesting of
2.7 million options with a weighted average exercise price
of $10.99.
The Company is currently evaluating the impact of adopting
SFAS No. 123(R); however, it believes the adoption of
SFAS No. 123(R) will result in an additional expense
ranging from $5.0 million to $7.0 million in 2006 (in
addition to the expense recognition of the unamortized
December 31, 2005 stock-based compensation balance of
$9.4 million) based on options outstanding which have been
granted through December 31, 2005. This estimated impact
excludes the effect of any new options granted or terminations
taking place subsequent to this date. The overall impact on the
Company’s consolidated financial statements will be
dependent on the option-pricing model used to compute fair value
and the inputs to that model such as volatility and expected
life. Accordingly, the actual stock based compensation expense
may differ materially from the Company’s estimates. The
pro-forma disclosures of the impact of SFAS No. 123
provided above may not be representative of the impact of
adopting SFAS No. 123(R).
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS —
(Continued)
In accordance with the provisions of SFAS 123, the fair
value of each option or ESPP share is estimated using the
following assumptions at the date of grant:
2003
2Years
Ended December 31,05
2005
ESPP
ESPP
ESPP
Weighted average fair value per option
$
6.57
$
1.59
$
6.60
$
2.05
$
3.76
$
1.91
Risk free interest rate
2.10
%
2.94
%
3.51
%
1.70
%
3.75
%
3.05
%
Expected life (years)
3.6
1.75
4.11
0.8
4.04
1.25
Expected stock price volatility
92
%
88
%
92
%
87
%
91
%
88
%
Dividend yield
—
—
—
—
—
—
Advertising and Market Development Costs
Advertising and market development costs were charged to
operations as incurred. Advertising and market development costs
amounted to $38.9 million for the year ended
December 31, 2005 of which $24.3 million was offset
against revenue in accordance with Emerging Issues Task Force
Issue No. 01-09,
“EITF 01-09”,
and $14.6 million was charged as an operating expense.
Advertising and market development costs amounted to
$34.7 million for the year ended December 31, 2004 of
which $15.4 million was offset against revenue in
accordance with
EITF 01-09, and
$19.3 million was charged as an operating expense.
Advertising and market development costs amounted to
$20.3 million for the year ended December 31, 2003 of
which $11.3 million was offset against revenue in
accordance with
EITF 01-09, and
$9.0 million was charged as an operating expense.
Consideration generally given by the Company to a customer is
presumed to be a reduction of selling price, and therefore, a
reduction of revenue. However, if the Company receives an
identifiable benefit in return for the consideration given to
its customer that is sufficiently separable from its sales to
that customer, such that the Company could have paid an
independent company to receive that benefit; and the Company can
reasonably estimate the fair value of that benefit, then the
consideration is characterized as an expense. The Company
estimates the fair value of the benefits it receives by tracking
the advertising done by its customers on its behalf and
calculating the value of that advertising using a comparable
rate for similar publications.
Deferred Taxes
Deferred income tax assets and liabilities are recorded based on
the computation of differences between the financial statement
and tax bases of assets and liabilities that will result in
taxable or deductible amounts in the future based on enacted tax
laws and rates applicable to the periods in which the
differences are expected to affect taxable income. Valuation
allowances are established when necessary to reduce deferred tax
assets to an amount that the Company has estimated is more
likely than not to be realized.
Comprehensive Income
Comprehensive income is defined as the change in equity of a
company during a period from transactions and other events and
circumstances from non-owner sources. Accumulated other
comprehensive loss at December 31, 2003 was attributable
solely to the effects of foreign currency translation.
Accumulated other comprehensive loss at December 31, 2004
was attributable to foreign currency translation and unrealized
loss on available-for-sale securities. Accumulated other
comprehensive income at December 31, 2005 was attributable
to foreign currency translation and unrealized gain on
available-for-sale securities.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS —
(Continued)
Shipping and Handling Costs
Certain shipping and handling costs are included in selling and
marketing costs in the statements of operations. These costs
were $8.3 million in 2003, $21.5 million in 2004, and
$21.7 million in 2005. Shipping and handling fees charged
to customers are included in revenues. The Company defers the
shipping and handling costs associated with shipments for which
revenue has not yet been recognized. Deferred shipping and
handling costs of $3.0 million and $1.2 million are
recorded in prepaid expenses and other current assets on the
consolidated balance sheet at December 31, 2004 and
December 31, 2005, respectively.
Goodwill and Intangible Assets
Intangible assets consist of goodwill and purchased patents.
Patents are being amortized on a straight-line basis to
operations over three years. The Company adopted
SFAS No. 142, Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets
(“SFAS No. 142”), on January 1, 2002.
In accordance with SFAS No. 142, goodwill is no longer
being amortized. Instead, goodwill is reviewed annually for
impairment.
Product Warranties
The Company provides warranties that range from one year for
digital music players and the xD Picture Card to lifetime
warranties for its professional products. The Company’s
liability is limited at its option to replacement or rework of
the product, plus any freight and delivery costs, or to refund
the purchase price less any rebates. The Company usually
provides a replaced or reworked product rather than a refund or
credit to meet warranty obligations. This policy is necessary to
protect its distributors, to improve customer satisfaction, and
for competitive reasons. Additionally, it is the custom in Japan
and Europe to provide this benefit.
In the second quarter of 2005, in collaboration with Canon, the
Company identified a lost image condition found to be rare and
specific to select Canon cameras when used with certain
CompactFlash cards, including its own. To ensure compatibility,
the Company offered to rework its Professional 80x CompactFlash
cards and Canon offered a camera firmware update to address
issues experienced with other cards for customers who
experienced the problem with the identified Canon cameras. The
Company and Canon continue to work together to ensure
compatibility across product lines. The total estimated cost to
rework the affected products is expected to be approximately
$0.9 million, all of which was provided for in the second
quarter of 2005. Aggregate costs incurred to rework the affected
products at December 31, 2005 were approximately
$0.3 million. Prior to this event, warranty expenses were
not material.
Flash memory products included inventory on consignment at the
Company’s customers of $22.9 million and
$21.5 million at December 31, 2004 and
December 31, 2005, respectively.
Property and equipment consisted of the following:
Construction in progress is comprised primarily of internal use
software being developed for which depreciation will begin upon
its first production use.
The Company’s market development fund expenditures are used
primarily to support product related promotional activities
performed by its customers on its behalf. The Company accrues
these expenses at the time the associated product revenue is
recognized as sales and marketing expenses. However, to the
extent that the fair market value of such promotional activities
is not determined through independent valuation, the expense is
recorded as a reduction in revenues.
Deferred license revenue and product margin consisted of the
following:
NOTE 4 — NET INCOME (LOSS) PER COMMON
SHARE (in thousands, except per share data):
Basic net income (loss) per common share is computed by dividing
net income (loss) available to common stockholders by the
weighted average number of common shares outstanding for the
period. Diluted net income (loss) per share is computed by
giving effect to all dilutive potential common shares, including
options, warrants and senior convertible notes. The numerator
and denominator used in the calculation of
Denominator for net income (loss) per common share —
basic:
Weighted average common shares outstanding
70,674
78,869
80,119
Weighted average unvested common shares subject to repurchase
(117
)
—
—
Denominator for net income (loss) per common share —
basic
70,557
78,869
80,119
Net income (loss) per common share — basic
$
0.57
$
(0.96
)
$
(0.45
)
Denominator for net income (loss) per common share —
diluted:
Denominator for net income (loss) per common share —
basic
70,557
78,869
80,119
Incremental common shares attributable to exercise of
outstanding stock options and warrants (assuming proceeds would
be used to purchase common stock)
11,118
—
—
Weighted average unvested common shares subject to repurchase
117
—
—
Denominator for net income (loss) per common share —
diluted
81,792
78,869
80,119
Net income (loss) per common share — diluted
$
0.49
$
(0.96
)
$
(0.45
)
Antidilutive Securities
Securities listed below have not been included in the
computations of diluted net income (loss) per share for the
years ended December 31, 2003, 2004, and 2005, because the
inclusion of these securities would be anti-dilutive (in
thousands):
Weighted average shares under options for common stock
101
18,258
20,980
Weighted average shares under senior convertible notes
—
—
7,708
Weighted average shares under warrants for common stock
—
41
16
NOTE 5 — OPERATING SEGMENTS AND GEOGRAPHIC
INFORMATION
The Company follows SFAS No. 131, “Disclosures
about Segments of an Enterprise and Related Information,”
(“SFAS No. 131”)
During the fourth quarter of 2005, the Company determined that
its revenues and operations had grown and diversified such that
the Company could now determine two distinct operating segments
driven by its revenue stream: (1) Retail and (2) OEM.
In addition, the Company has license and royalty revenues.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS —
(Continued)
The Chief Operating Decision Maker (“CODM”), as
defined by SFAS No. 131, is the Company’s
President and Chief Executive Officer. The CODM allocates
resources to and assesses the performance of each operating
segment using information about its revenue and cost of revenue.
The Company does not identify or allocate operating expenses or
assets by operating segment, nor does the CODM evaluate
operating segments using discrete asset information. Operating
segments do not record intersegment revenue, and, accordingly,
there is none to be reported. The Company does not allocate
interest and other income, interest expense or taxes to
operating segments. The accounting policies for segment
reporting are the same as for the Company as a whole.
Regional revenues are reported according to the location of the
customers who have purchased the Company’s products or
licensed the Company’s technology.
On March 30, 2005, the Company issued $60.0 million in
aggregate principal amount of 5.625% senior convertible
notes due April 1, 2010 in a private offering (the
“Notes”). On May 27, 2005the Company issued an
additional $10.0 million in aggregate principal amount of
the Notes upon the exercise by the purchasers of their option to
purchase such Notes under the same terms as the initial
issuance. The Notes are unsecured senior obligations, ranking
equally in right of payment with all of the Company’s
existing and future unsecured senior indebtedness, and senior in
right of payment to any future indebtedness that is expressly
subordinated to the Notes.
The Notes are convertible into shares of the Company’s
common stock any time at the option of the holders of the Notes
at a price equal to approximately $6.68 per share, subject
to adjustment in certain circumstances, which represented a 30%
premium over the closing price of the Company’s common
stock of $5.14 on March 29, 2005. The indenture governing
the Notes (the “Indenture”) provides that no holder of
the Notes has the right to convert any portion of the Notes to
the extent that, after giving effect to such conversion, such
holder (together with such holder’s affiliates) would
beneficially own in excess of 4.99% of
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS —
(Continued)
the Company’s common stock outstanding immediately after
giving effect to such conversion. Interest on the Notes is
payable on March 31 and September 30 of each year,
beginning on September 30, 2005.
The Notes are redeemable, in whole or in part, for cash at the
Company’s option beginning on April 1, 2008 at a
redemption price equal to the principal amount of the Notes
being redeemed plus accrued but unpaid interest, if any, up to
but excluding the redemption date; provided, however, that the
Company may only exercise such redemption right if its common
stock has exceeded 175% of the conversion price of the Notes for
at least 20 trading days in the 30 consecutive trading days
ending on the trading day prior to the date upon which the
Company delivers the notice of redemption. Upon redemption, the
Company will be required to make a payment equal to the net
present value of the remaining scheduled interest payments
through April 1, 2010.
Upon the occurrence of a “fundamental change,” as
defined in the Indenture, the holders of the Notes will have:
•
the option to receive, if and only to the extent the holders
convert their Notes into its common stock, a make-whole premium
of additional shares of common stock equal to the approximate
lost option time value, if any, plus accrued but unpaid
interest, if any, up to but excluding the conversion
date; or
•
the right to require the Company to purchase for cash any or all
of its Notes at a repurchase price equal to the principal amount
of the Notes being repurchased plus accrued but unpaid interest,
if any, up to but excluding the repurchase date.
The conversion rate of the Notes will be subject to adjustment
upon the occurrence of certain events, including the following:
•
the Company declares certain dividends or distributions;
the Company offers certain rights or warrants to all or
substantially all its stockholders;
•
the Company purchases shares of its common stock pursuant to a
tender or exchange offer under certain circumstances.
Upon the occurrence of an “event of default,” as
defined in the Indenture, the holders of at least 25% in
aggregate principal amount of the Notes or the trustee for the
Notes under the Indenture shall have the right to cause the
principal amount of the Notes to become due and payable
immediately (except in certain events of bankruptcy, insolvency
or the Company’s reorganization, in which case the
principal amount of the Notes shall automatically become due and
payable immediately).
On a change in control in which less then 90% of the
consideration consists of shares of capital stock or American
Depository Shares that are (A) listed on, or immediately
after the transaction or event will be listed on, the New York
Stock Exchange or the American Stock Exchange, or
(B) approved, or immediately after the transaction will be
approved, for quotation on the Nasdaq National Market or the
Nasdaq SmallCap Market and as result of such transaction or
transactions the Notes become convertible into or exchangeable
or exercisable for such publicly traded securities, the holders
of the Notes will be entitled to additional consideration (the
“Make-Whole Premium”) equal to the principal amount of
the note to be converted divided by $1,000 and multiplied by the
applicable number of shares of common stock ranging from
1.37 shares to 44.90 shares depending on the stock
price on the effective date of the change of control and the
effective date.
Total cash proceeds from these issuances of the Notes aggregated
$66.3 million, net of issuance costs of $3.7 million.
The issuance costs are being amortized over the term of the
Notes to April 1, 2010.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS —
(Continued)
NOTE 7 — SHORT TERM BANK BORROWINGS:
In April 2004, the Company entered into a credit agreement with
Wells Fargo Bank which enabled the Company to borrow up to
$40.0 million under a revolving line of credit note. All
advances under this revolving line of credit note were secured
by the Company’s accounts receivable and other rights to
payment, general intangibles, inventory, equipment and proceeds
of the foregoing. The Company used the proceeds from this loan
to fund working capital requirements. On February 28, 2005,
the Company entered into a three-year asset based revolving
credit facility arranged and agented by Wells Fargo Foothill
with a maximum loan commitment of $80.0 million which
replaced the previous facility. The actual amount available for
borrowing depends upon the value of the Company’s North
American accounts receivable base. At December 31, 2005 the
amount available to the Company under this facility was
$54.7 million of which the Company borrowed
$54.7 million. This facility was fully repaid subsequent to
December 31, 2005. Borrowings under this facility bear
interest at the Company’s choice of one of two floating
rates: either an annual rate equal to LIBOR plus 1.75 to
2.25 percentage points, depending on availability under the
facility and the amount of its unrestricted cash, or an annual
rate equal to the bank’s prime rate plus 0.25 to
0.75 percentage points, depending on availability under the
facility and the amount of its unrestricted cash. At
December 31, 2005, the annual interest rate for borrowings
under the facility was 7.5 percent determined using the
bank’s prime rate.
The asset based credit facility with Wells Fargo Foothill is
secured by substantially all of the Company’s property and
assets (other than leased real property), including, but not
limited to, inventories, accounts receivable, equipment, chattel
paper, documents, instruments, deposit accounts, cash and cash
equivalents, investment property, commercial tort claims and all
proceeds and products thereof. The Company did not, however,
grant a security interest in its intellectual property rights,
including, but not limited to, copyrights, trademarks, patents
and related rights, although the Company did grant a negative
pledge on all such intellectual property rights. In addition,
the Company pledged 65% of the common stock of each of its
foreign subsidiaries as collateral to secure the asset-based
facility.
Pursuant to the credit agreement with Wells Fargo Foothill, the
Company must comply with certain affirmative and negative
covenants. The affirmative covenants include a restriction on
capital expenditures of up to $3.5 million in any fiscal
year and a requirement that the company reports losses before
interest, tax, depreciation and amortization, commonly referred
to as “EBITDA,” of not more than a loss of
$22.5 million for the six months ended June 30, 2005,
a loss of $18.2 million for the nine months ended
September 30, 2005, a loss of $4 million for the year
ended December 31, 2005 and a loss of not more than the
loss in the immediately preceding period for any trailing twelve
month period thereafter. However, as of December 31, 2005,
the Company was not subject to the foregoing affirmative
covenants because its qualified cash under the agreement was in
excess of $40 million, the Company had raised capital in
excess of $50 million since entering into the credit
facility, and there were no uncured known defaults under the
agreement. The Company was, however, in default of one of the
financial reporting affirmative covenants. Subsequent to
December 31, 2005, the Company provided the required
financial reporting information and Wells Fargo Foothill has
waived the default. The negative covenants with which the
Company must comply include, among others: limitations on
indebtedness; liens; distribution or disposal of assets; changes
in the nature of its business; investments; mergers or
consolidations with or into third parties; restriction on
payment of dividends; transactions with affiliates; and
modifications to material agreements in a manner materially
adverse to the lender.
Upon the occurrence of an event of default, the Company’s
obligations under the credit facility may become immediately due
and payable. Events of default include, among others, the
Company’s failure to pay its obligations under the credit
facility when due; the Company’s failure to perform any
covenant set forth in the credit agreement; the attachment or
seizure of a material portion of its assets; an insolvency
proceeding is commenced by or against the Company; the Company
is restrained from conducting any material part of its business;
any judgment in excess of $250,000 is filed against the Company
and not released, discharged, bonded against or stayed pending
an appeal within 30 days; breach of any material warranty
in the credit
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS —
(Continued)
agreement; breach or termination of a material contract; or the
acceleration of, or default in connection with, any indebtedness
involving an aggregate amount of $250,000 or more.
NOTE 8 — HEDGING:
The Company has foreign subsidiaries that operate and sell its
products in various global markets. As a result, the Company is
exposed to risks associated with changes in foreign currency
exchange rates between the functional currencies of its
subsidiaries and other currencies. At any point in time, the
Company might use various hedging instruments, primarily forward
contracts, to mitigate the exposures associated with
fluctuations in foreign currency exchange rates. The Company
does not enter into derivative financial instruments for
speculative or trading purposes.
The Company records its hedges of foreign currency denominated
assets and liabilities at fair value, with the related gains or
losses recorded in foreign exchange gain (loss) in the
Consolidated Statements of Operations. The foreign exchange
gains and losses on these contracts were substantially offset by
transaction losses and gains on the underlying balances being
hedged. In addition, at December 31, 2005, the Company had
foreign currency denominated assets and liabilities that were
not hedged. Net foreign exchange losses for years ended
December 31, 2003, 2004 and 2005 were approximately
$0.7 million, $1.1 million and $0.3 million,
respectively. As of December 31, 2004 and December 31,2005, the Company held forward contracts for yen and pound
sterling with aggregate notional values of $59.5 million
and $40.1 million, respectively.
NOTE 9 — INCOME TAXES:
The components of income (loss) before income taxes for the
years ended December 31, 2003 through December 31,2005 are as follows (in thousands):
Income tax expense for 2005 relates primarily to foreign
withholding taxes of $3.8 million related to license and
royalty payments received and foreign withholding taxes of
$1.8 million on a payment received from a supplier. Income
tax expense for 2004 includes $0.3 million related to
federal and state income taxes and $1.1 million in foreign
income taxes (including $0.2 million related to income
derived from foreign license revenue). Income tax expense for
2003 includes $2.5 million related to state income taxes,
which resulted primarily from the State of California’s
decision during the third quarter of 2002 to retroactively
suspend the state income tax net operating loss deduction for a
two-year period, $1.0 million in foreign income taxes and
$0.7 million in federal alternative minimum taxes.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS —
(Continued)
The tax effects of temporary differences, including amounts
related to stock options, that give rise to significant portions
of the deferred tax assets and liabilities are presented below
(in thousands):
Deferred tax assets, net of deferred tax liabilities:
Net operating loss carryforwards
$
57,413
$
61,724
Depreciation and amortization
753
901
Research credit carryforwards
2,818
3,445
Stock compensation
471
451
Deferred license revenue and product margin
7,490
10,607
Reserves and accruals
11,878
19,168
80,823
96,296
Less: valuation allowance
(80,823
)
(96,296
)
$
—
$
—
The Company has established a 100% valuation allowance since
currently it is more likely than not that no benefit will be
realized for its deferred tax assets. The valuation allowance
increased by $31.5 million in 2004 and $15.5 million
in 2005. At December 31, 2005, the valuation allowance
includes approximately $21.2 million, which is attributable
to stock option plans, the benefit from which will be credited
to additional paid in capital when recognized.
Total income tax expense differs from the expected tax expense
as a result of the following:
Net operating losses and other deductions not benefited
(33.1
)%
34.5
%
35.0
%
Federal alternative minimum tax
1.5
%
0.0
%
0.0
%
9.5
%
1.8
%
17.9
%
At December 31, 2005, for federal, state and foreign income
tax reporting purposes the Company had net operating loss carry
forwards of approximately $160.0 million,
$104.0 million, and $2.0 million, respectively,
available to offset future taxable income. At December 31,2005, the Company had federal research credits and state
research credits of approximately $2.5 million and
$1.4 million, respectively, available to offset future
taxes. The federal operating loss and research credit carry
forwards will begin to expire in 2011 if not utilized. The state
operating loss carry forwards will begin to expire in 2006, if
not utilized. The state research credits have no expiration
date. The foreign operating loss carry forward will begin to
expire in 2010, if not utilized.
The Tax Reform Act of 1986 limits the use of net operating loss
and tax credit carry forwards in certain situations where
changes occur in the stock ownership of a company. In the event
the Company has a change in ownership, as defined in the Tax
Reform Act, utilization of the carry forwards could be
restricted.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS —
(Continued)
NOTE 10 — STOCKHOLDERS’ EQUITY:
Preferred Stock
The Company is authorized to issue 10 million shares of
preferred stock. As of December 31, 2005 there was no
preferred stock issued or outstanding. The Board of Directors
has the authority to issue the preferred stock in one or more
series and to fix rights, preferences, privileges and
restrictions, and the number of shares constituting any series
and the designation of such series, without any further vote or
action by the stockholders.
Common Stock
Warrants
The following warrants to purchase common stock were outstanding
at December 31, 2004 (in thousands, except per share
amounts):
Number of Shares
Number of Shares
Outstanding at
Exercise
(Common Stock
Black-Scholes
December 31,
Date Issued
Price
Equivalents)
Value Per Share
Reason
2003 and 2004
May-July 2000
$
3.09
644
$
4.712
Bridge financing
24
June-Sept. 2000
$
8.00
345
$
6.470
Bridge financing
17
41
All unexercised outstanding warrants expired on May 31,2005.
During the year ended December 31, 2003, warrants for the
purchase of 1,093,580 shares at prices ranging from $1.00
to $8.00 per share (weighted average — $4.08) of
common stock were exercised on a net basis resulting in the
issuance of 768,686 shares of common stock. The fair value
of the shares retired to effect the net purchases ranged from
$5.44 to $21.10 per share (weighted average —
$13.74) of common stock. No warrants were exercised in 2004.
During the year ended December 31, 2005, warrants for the
purchase of 24,271 shares at $3.09 per share of common
stock were exercised on a net basis resulting in the issuance of
9,478 shares of common stock. The fair value of the shares
retired to effect the net purchases was $5.07 per share of
common stock.
NOTE 11 — STOCK OPTION PLANS:
The 1996 Stock Option/ Stock Issuance Plan
The Company’s 1996 Stock Option/ Stock Issuance Plan is
divided into three separate equity programs: the option grant
program, the stock issuance program and the stock bonus program.
Under the Plan, the exercise price per share of the stock
options granted to employees, members of its Board of Directors
or consultants may not be less than 85% (110% for a 10%
stockholder) of the fair market value on the option grant date.
Incentive options may only be granted to employees and the
exercise price per share could not be less than 100% of the fair
market value per share of its common stock on the option grant
date.
Each option is exercisable as determined by the Board of
Directors for all of the option shares and has a maximum term of
ten years from the date of the grant. The Company has the right
to repurchase, at the time of cessation of employment, at the
exercise price paid per share any unvested shares, as
established by its Board of Directors. As of December 31,2005, the Company had reserved 690,467 shares for options
remaining outstanding under the Plan, all of which were fully
vested.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS —
(Continued)
The 2000 Equity Incentive Plan
On January 21, 2000, the Company’s Board of Directors
adopted the 2000 Equity Incentive Plan subject to stockholder
approval. The 2000 Equity Incentive Plan became effective on the
date of the Company’s initial public offering and was
amended in April 2004. The Plan is the successor to its 1996
Stock Option/ Stock Issuance Plan. The 2000 Equity Incentive
Plan authorizes the award of options, restricted stock awards
and stock bonuses.
The exercise price of incentive stock options must be at least
equal to the fair market value of the Company’s common
stock on the date of grant. The exercise price of incentive
stock options granted to 10% or greater stockholders must be at
least equal to 110% of the fair market value of its common stock
on the date of grant. The exercise price of nonqualified stock
options must be at least equal to 85% of the fair market value
of its common stock on the date of grant.
The Company initially reserved 8,000,000 shares of common
stock for issuance under the 2000 Equity Incentive Plan. The
number of shares reserved for issuance under this plan was
increased to include shares of its common stock reserved under
the 1996 Stock Option/ Stock Issuance Plan that were not issued
or subject to outstanding grants on the date of its initial
public offering.
The number of shares reserved for issuance under this plan is
further increased to include:
•
any shares of common stock issued under the 1996 Stock Option/
Stock Issuance Plan that are repurchased by the Company at the
original purchase price;
•
any shares of common stock issuable upon exercise of options
granted under the 1996 Stock Option/ Stock Issuance Plan that
expired or became unexercisable without having been exercised in
full.
In addition, under the terms of the 2000 Equity Incentive Plan,
the number of shares of common stock reserved for issuance under
the plan increase automatically on January 1 of each year by an
amount equal to 5% of the total outstanding shares of common
stock as of the immediately preceding December 31. The
Board of Directors or its Compensation Committee may reduce the
amount of the increase in any particular year. The 2000 Equity
Incentive Plan will terminate on January 20, 2010, unless
the Board of Directors terminates it earlier.
Stock option activity under the 1996 Stock Option/ Stock
Issuance Plan and the 2000 Equity Incentive Plan for the period
from January 1, 2003 to December 31, 2005 is
summarized below (in thousands, except per share amounts):
On January 21, 2000, the Board of Directors approved the
adoption of the 2000 Employee Stock Purchase Plan, which became
effective on the first business day on which price quotations
for its common stock were available on the Nasdaq National
Market. The employee stock purchase plan is designed to enable
eligible employees to purchase shares of its common stock at 85%
of the lesser of the fair market value of such shares at the
beginning of an offering period or the end of each six-month
segment within such an offering period. The Company initially
reserved 1,000,000 shares under this plan for grants to
employees. In addition, under the terms of the 2000 Employee
Stock Purchase Plan, the number of shares of its common stock
reserved for issuance under the plan increase automatically on
January 1 of each year by an amount equal to 1% of its total
outstanding shares of common stock as of the immediately
preceding December 31.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS —
(Continued)
Activity under the 2000 Employee Stock Purchase Plan for the
period from January 1, 2003 to December 31, 2005 is
summarized below (in thousands, except per share amounts):
The following table summarizes information about stock options
outstanding at December 31, 2005 (shares in thousands):
Number Exercisable
Number
Weighted Average
Weighted Average
Not Subject to
Weighted Average
Exercise Price
Outstanding
Contractual Life
Exercise Price
Repurchase
Exercise Price
$0.20-$2.00
3,740
5.31
$
1.01
3,740
$
1.01
$2.50-$2.69
3,065
6.59
$
2.69
2,443
$
2.68
$2.76-$5.50
2,724
6.43
$
4.95
2,019
$
4.96
$5.51-$9.56
5,698
8.42
$
7.50
2,963
$
8.40
$9.68-$11.20
3,925
7.54
$
11.16
3,762
$
11.18
$12.76-$23.65
607
8.01
$
15.89
556
$
15.83
19,759
15,483
NOTE 12 — BENEFIT PLANS:
For its United States employees, the Company has a 401(k)
savings plan. Company matching under the plan is at the
Company’s discretion. As of December 31, 2005, the
Company had not made any matching contributions or discretionary
contributions under the plan.
Lexar Media, Ltd., the Company’s U.K. subsidiary, has a
defined contribution shareholder pension plan available to its
employees pursuant to statutory requirement. Under this pension
plan, both employees and Lexar Media, Ltd. may make
contributions into the pension plan. To date, contributions by
Lexar Media, Ltd. into the pension plan have been insignificant.
Lexar Hong Kong Ltd., the Company’s Hong Kong subsidiary
has a retirement savings plan for its employees as mandated by
statutory requirement. Under this plan, both employees and Lexar
Hong Kong Ltd. must each make contributions of 5% of each
employee’s income into the plan. To date, contributions by
Lexar Hong Kong Ltd. have been insignificant.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS —
(Continued)
NOTE 13 — COMMITMENTS:
The Company leases its Fremont, California, Boca Raton, Florida,
U.K., Japanese, Singapore, Shanghai, and Hong Kong facilities
under operating lease agreements expiring on various dates
through December 28, 2014. Rent expense was
$0.8 million, $0.8 million, and $1.3 million for
the years ended December 31, 2003, 2004, and 2005,
respectively. The Company has options to renew its leases for
its Fremont, Hong Kong and Japanese facilities for an additional
five years, three years and two years, respectively. Sublease
income was approximately $0.1 million for the year ended
December 31, 2003. There was no sublease income for the
year ended December 31, 2004 and December 31, 2005.
Minimum lease payments under all non-cancelable operating leases
are as follows (in thousands):
Minimum
Years Ending December 31,
lease payments
2006
$
1,413
2007
1,338
2008
1,109
2009
554
2010
290
Thereafter
1,087
Total minimum lease payments
$
5,791
The Company purchases the majority of its flash memory from
Samsung pursuant to a supply agreement that has been extended
through March 24, 2011. Samsung has guaranteed a certain
allocation of its flash memory production capacity to the
Company. Under the supply agreement, purchases are priced based
on an agreed upon methodology and Samsung provides the Company
with intellectual property indemnification for the products the
Company purchases from Samsung. Either party can terminate the
supply agreement in the event of the other party’s breach
of the agreement or bankruptcy. The Company is not obligated to
purchase minimum volumes of flash memory from Samsung.
The Company also has a supply agreement with UMC under which the
Company purchases semiconductor wafers used by the Company in
the manufacture of controllers. The purchase commitment for such
wafers is generally restricted to a forecasted time horizon
based on a rolling forecast of our anticipated purchase orders.
This agreement expires on December 31, 2006 unless the
agreement is extended. If the Company does not extend the
agreement, the Company intends to continue to purchase wafers
from UMC on a purchase order basis. The Company has also entered
into a supply agreement with SMI, whereby SMI supplies the
Company with controllers for certain of its digital media
products. The Company is obligated to provide rolling forecasts
to SMI and SMI has agreed to maintain a buffer stock to meet the
Company’s needs. SMI also provides the Company with
standard warranty and indemnity protections. This agreement runs
through September 2007 and may be terminated by either party in
the event of the other party’s bankruptcy or breach of the
agreement.
The Company depends on third party subcontractors for assembly
and testing of its digital media products. The Company does not
have long-term agreements with these subcontractors. Instead,
the Company procures services from these subcontractors on a
per-order basis. These third party subcontractors typically
purchase certain components to be used in the manufacture and
assembly of its digital media products. If the Company was to
not use these components, these subcontractors may claim that
the cost of these products is the Company’s responsibility.
The Company enters into partnerships programs with companies for
branded products. As part of these programs, the Company may
have royalty programs based on sales, with targets in the
agreements. If these targets are not met, the recourse may be
termination of these programs, depending on the terms of the
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS —
(Continued)
contract. The Company has entered into an exclusive multi-year
agreement with Kodak under which the Company will manufacture
and distribute a full range of branded memory cards. The
management of the Kodak business could adversely affect the
Company’s revenues and gross margins if the Company is,
among other things, unable to:
•
properly manage the distribution and use of the brand;
•
control the sales and marketing expenses associated with
launching the brand in new channels;
•
plan for anticipated changes in demand;
•
effectively leverage the brand to achieve premium pricing and
grow market share;
•
maintain the market share position of the Lexar brand; and
•
appropriately allocate resources to support a dual branding
strategy.
In the future, a meaningful portion of the Company’s
revenue may be derived from sales of digital media under the
Kodak brand. The Company has a number of obligations that the
Company must fulfill under its agreement with Kodak to keep the
license exclusive and to keep it in effect. These obligations
include compliance with Kodak guidelines and trademark usage,
customer satisfaction, and the requirement that the Company
meets market share goals and target minimum royalty payments. As
of December 31, 2005, the Company has not met these
targets. As a result, Kodak may in the future have the right to
make the Company’s license non-exclusive or to terminate
the Company’s license in its entirety. If the Company was
to lose the rights to sell products under the Kodak brand, its
financial results could be significantly negatively impacted.
NOTE 14 — CONTINGENCIES:
Indemnifications
The Company is a party to a variety of agreements pursuant to
which the Company may be obligated to indemnify the other party
with respect to certain matters. Typically these obligations
arise in connection with sales contracts and license agreements
under which the Company customarily agrees to hold the other
party harmless against any losses incurred as a result of a
claim by any third party with respect to its products. The
Company also typically agrees to pay any costs incurred in
defense of any such claim. The terms of the indemnification
obligations are generally perpetual from the effective date of
the agreement. In certain cases, there are limits and exceptions
to its potential liability for indemnification relating to
intellectual property infringement claims. The Company cannot
estimate the amount of potential future payments, if any, that
the Company might be required to make as a result of these
agreements. To date, the amounts required to defend
indemnification claims have been insignificant. Accordingly, the
Company did not accrue any amounts for these indemnification
obligations.
The Company has agreements whereby its directors and officers
are indemnified for certain events or occurrences while the
officer or director is serving at its request in such capacity.
The maximum amount of future payment the Company could be
required to make under these indemnification agreements is
unlimited; however, the Company has a directors’ and
officers’ insurance policy that reduces its exposure and
enables us to recover a portion of any future amounts paid. As a
result of its insurance policy coverage, the Company believes
the estimated fair value of these indemnification agreements is
minimal. Accordingly, the Company did not record any liabilities
for these agreements.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS —
(Continued)
Litigation with Toshiba
The Company is involved in three separate lawsuits with Toshiba
as follows:
Lexar Media, Inc. v. Toshiba Corporation, Toshiba
America, Inc. and Toshiba America Electronics Corporation
On November 4, 2002, the Company filed a lawsuit in
Santa Clara County Superior Court against Toshiba
Corporation, Toshiba America, Inc. and Toshiba America
Electronics Corporation (“TAEC”) alleging theft of
trade secrets and breach of fiduciary duty. The Company later
filed an amended complaint to add violation of California
Business and Professions Code Section 17200 and to drop
without prejudice claims against Toshiba America, Inc. The basis
of the Company’s allegations were that since the
Company’s inception in 1996, and including the period from
1997 through 1999 when Toshiba was represented on its Board of
Directors, Toshiba had access to and was presented with details
of its strategy as well as its methods of achieving high
performance flash devices that Toshiba has now incorporated into
its flash chips and flash systems.
Trial began on February 7, 2005, and after a six-week
trial, on March 23, 2005 the jury found that Toshiba
Corporation and TAEC misappropriated the Company’s trade
secrets and breached their fiduciary duty to the Company. The
jury awarded the Company $255.4 million in damages for
Toshiba’s misappropriation of trade secrets. The jury also
awarded the Company $58.7 million in damages for
Toshiba’s breach of fiduciary duty, $58.7 million in
damages for TAEC’s breach of fiduciary duty and
$8.2 million in prejudgment interest for breach of
fiduciary duty. The jury also found Toshiba and TAEC’s
breach of fiduciary duty was oppressive, fraudulent or malicious
which supported an award of punitive damages. On March 25,2005, the jury awarded an additional $84.0 million in
punitive damages. The total of these awarded damages is over
$465.0 million.
On October 5, 2005, the Superior Court of the State of
California entered a Statement of Decision in which it found
that Toshiba engaged in unfair or unlawful competition, thereby
violating California Business and Professions Code
Section 17200. However, the Court declined the
Company’s request to enter an injunction against Toshiba
flash memory products that incorporate its trade secrets and
further declined to order any additional monetary relief.
On December 2, 2005, the Court issued an order granting
defendants’ motion for a new trial on the economic and
monetary awards for misappropriation of trade secrets and breach
of fiduciary duty. The Court denied defendants’ motion for
a new trial on all other grounds and also denied the motion for
judgment notwithstanding the verdict. The effect of the
Court’s order is that the jury’s damage award of
approximately $465 million has been set aside and interest
will not accrue on this amount.
Both defendants and the Company have appealed the Court’s
December 2, 2005 order. Defendants have appealed from those
portions of the order that denies them a new trial on liability
and denies their motion for judgment notwithstanding the
verdict. The Company has appealed from that portion of the order
that grants defendants a new trial on damages. Defendants have
also protectively cross-appealed from the judgment, meaning that
should the order granting a new trial on damages be set aside,
the Court of Appeals would need to address aspects of the
judgment that defendants challenge in that context. In all
events, because of the parties’ cross appeals from the new
trial order, the Court of Appeals will address both damages and
liability issues presented by the jury’s verdict.
If the briefing goes as expected, the Company expects that the
Court of Appeals will hold argument on the appeals in the third
or fourth quarter of 2007. There are a number of possible
dispositions of the appeal, including an
across-the-board
affirmance of the order granting a new damages trial and denying
defendants’ motion for judgment notwithstanding the
verdict. If this occurs, and if the Supreme Court does not grant
review of the Court of Appeal’s decision, the new damages
trial would likely take place in the Santa Clara
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS —
(Continued)
County Superior Court in 2008. If the Supreme Court granted
review, however, the appellate proceedings would likely not
conclude until 2010, with a new damages trial possible
thereafter.
Toshiba Corporation v. Lexar Media, Inc.; Lexar Media,
Inc. v. Toshiba Corporation
On November 1, 2002, Toshiba Corporation filed a lawsuit
seeking declaratory judgment that Toshiba does not infringe the
Company’s U.S. Patent Nos. 5,479,638; 5,818,781;
5,907,856; 5,930,815; 6,034,897; 6,040,997; 6,134,151;
6,141,249; 6,145,051; 6,172,906; 6,202,138; 6,262,918;
6,374,337; and 6,397,314 or that these patents are invalid. This
suit was filed in the United States District Court for the
Northern District of California. Toshiba does not seek monetary
damages or an injunction in this action. The Company believes
that Toshiba’s claims are without merit and are contesting
this lawsuit vigorously.
On November 21, 2002, the Company filed an answer and
counterclaim in which the Company alleged that Toshiba infringes
its U.S. Patent Nos. 5,818,781; 5,907,856; 5,930,815;
6,034,897; 6,040,997; 6,134,151; 6,172,906; 6,202,138; and
6,374,337. The Company sought an injunction and damages against
Toshiba.
On December 20, 2002, Toshiba filed its first amended
complaint in which Toshiba dropped its allegations that our
patents are unenforceable.
On February 28, 2003, the Company filed an answer and our
first amended counterclaim against Toshiba for infringement of
our U.S. Patent Nos. 5,479,638; 5,818,781; 5,907,856;
5,930,815; 6,034,897; 6,040,997; 6,134,151; 6,141,249;
6,145,051; 6,172,906; 6,202,138; 6,262,918; 6,374,337; and
6,397,314. The Company is seeking damages as well as an
injunction against Toshiba for its products that the Company
alleges infringe our patents, including its flash memory chips,
flash cards and digital cameras.
Claim construction in our litigation against Toshiba was held in
August 2004. The Court issued a claim construction ruling on
January 24, 2005. The Company believes that the claim
construction ruling favorably construes the claims of the
Company’s patents.
This case has been coordinated for discovery purposes with the
Company’s litigation against Pretec Electronics Corporation
(“Pretec”), PNY Technologies, Inc. (“PNY”),
Memtek Products, Inc. (“Memtek”) and C-One. Discovery
has now commenced as to all defendants. The Lexar patents at
issue in the first phase of the litigation will be Lexar’s
U.S. Patent Nos. 5,479,638 entitled “Flash Memory Mass
Storage Architecture Incorporation Wear Leveling
Technique”; 6,145,051 entitled “Moving Sectors Within
Block of Information in a Flash Memory Mass Storage
Architecture”; 6,397,314 entitled “Increasing The
Memory Performance Of Flash Memory Devices By Writing Sectors
Simultaneously To Multiple Flash Memory Device”; 6,202,138
entitled “Increasing The Memory Performance Of Flash Memory
Devices By Writing Sectors Simultaneously To Multiple
Flash”; 6,262,918 entitled “Space Management For
Managing High Capacity Nonvolatile Memory”; and 6,040,997
entitled “Flash Memory Leveling Architecture Having No
External Latch.” The parties have now mutually dismissed
with prejudice all claims regarding U.S. Patent
No. 6,172,906.
On June 8, 2005, the Court issued a scheduling order that
bifurcated discovery and trial issues relating to infringement
from those relating to willfulness and damages. The current
schedule anticipates that discovery will be completed in the
second calendar quarter of 2006. The Court has indicated that it
expects to hold a further status conference in the second half
of 2006 at which time it will rule on the timing and sequence of
trial in the various actions.
The Company expects that a trial will take place in one of the
patent actions in late 2006 or the first half of 2007.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS —
(Continued)
Toshiba Corporation v. Lexar Media, Inc.
On January 13, 2003, Toshiba Corporation filed a lawsuit
against the Company in the United States District Court for the
Northern District of California, alleging that the Company
infringes Toshiba’s U.S. Patent Nos. 5,546,351;
5,724,300; 5,793,696; 5,946,231; 5,986,933; 6,145,023;
6,292,850; and 6,338,104. On February 7, 2003, Toshiba
Corporation filed an amended complaint and now alleges that the
Company infringes Toshiba’s U.S. Patent Nos.
5,546,351; 5,724,300; 5,793,696; 5,946,231; 5,986,933;
6,094,697; 6,292,850; 6,338,104; and 5,611,067. In this action,
Toshiba Corporation seeks injunctive relief and damages.
Toshiba’s patents appear to primarily relate to flash
components that the Company purchases from vendors who provide
the Company with indemnification. On March 5, 2003, the
Company filed an answer in which it is seeking a judgment that
it does not infringe these patents or that they are invalid or
unenforceable. The Company believes that Toshiba’s claims
are without merit and intends to contest this lawsuit vigorously.
Discovery in this case has commenced. This case has been
coordinated with the other patent litigation currently pending.
As discussed above, the current schedule anticipates that
discovery will be completed in the second calendar quarter of
2006. The Court has indicated that it expects to hold a further
status conference in the second half of 2006 at which time it
will rule on the timing and sequence of trial in the various
actions. The Company expects that a trial will take place in one
of the patent actions in late 2006 or the first half of 2007.
At this time, The Company is unable to reasonably estimate the
possible range of loss for this proceeding and, accordingly, has
not recorded any associated liabilities in its consolidated
financial statements at December 31, 2005.
Litigation Against Fuji, Memtek and PNY
On July 11, 2002, the Company filed a lawsuit in the United
States District Court for the Eastern District of Texas against
Fuji Photo Film USA (“Fuji”), Memtek and PNY for
patent infringement. The Company alleged that the defendants
infringe its U.S. Patent Nos. 5,479,638; 5,907,856;
5,930,815; 6,034,897; 6,134,151; 6,141,249; 6,145,051; and
6,262,918. The Company sought injunctive relief and damages
against all defendants.
On November 4, 2002, the Company filed an amended complaint
against Fuji. In the amended complaint, the Company alleges that
Fuji infringes U.S. Patent Nos. 5,479,638; 6,141,249;
6,145,051; 6,262,918; and 6,397,314 through the sale of its
flash memory products and digital cameras. The Company is
seeking injunctive relief and damages against Fuji, Memtek and
PNY are no longer parties to this particular action. On
December 9, 2002, Fuji filed an answer in which they sought
declaratory relief that they do not infringe the five patents
named in the suit as well as the Company’s U.S. Patent
Nos. 5,907,856; 5,930,815; 6,034,897; and 6,134,151.
On January 8, 2003, the United States District Court for
the Eastern District of Texas ordered this case transferred to
the United States District Court for the Northern District of
California where it is now pending.
In a second amended complaint, the Company added counterclaims
for infringement on the additional patents for which Fuji has
sought declaratory relief, U.S. Patent Nos. 5,907,856;
5,930,815; 6,034,897; and 6,134,151. Discovery in this case has
commenced. This case has been coordinated with the other patent
litigation currently pending. As discussed above, the current
schedule anticipates that discovery will be completed in the
second calendar quarter of 2006. The Court has indicated that it
expects to hold a further status conference in the second half
of 2006 at which time it will rule on the timing and sequence of
trial in the various actions.
The Company expects that a trial will take place in one of the
patent actions in late 2006 or the first half of 2007.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS —
(Continued)
On September 16, 2005, Fuji filed a lawsuit against the
Company in the United States District Court for the Southern
District of New York, alleging that certain of the
Company’s flash cards infringe Fuji’s U.S. Patent
No.’s 5,303,198; 5,386,539; and 5,390,148. In this action,
Fuji seeks injunctive relief and damages.
On February 14, 2006, the Court granted the Company’s
motion to transfer this case to the United States District Court
for the Northern District of California where it is now pending.
The Company believes that Fuji’s claims are without merit
and intends to contest this lawsuit vigorously. At this time,
the Company is unable to reasonably estimate the possible range
of loss for this proceeding and, accordingly, has not recorded
any associated liabilities in its consolidated financial
statements at December 31, 2005.
Litigation Against Pretec, PNY, Memtek and C-One
On December 22, 2000, the Company sued Pretec and PNY for
patent infringement. The Company sued Pretec and PNY on the
basis of four patents: U.S. Patent Nos. 5,818,781;
5,907,856; 5,930,815; and 6,145,051. The suit is pending in the
United States District Court for the Northern District of
California. The Company is seeking injunctive relief and damages
against all defendants.
On April 13, 2001, the Company filed an amended complaint
in its litigation with Pretec and PNY, naming Memtek as an
additional defendant. On June 26, 2001, the Court allowed
the Company to file its second amended complaint in our
litigation with Pretec and PNY, naming C-One as an additional
defendant and adding the Company’s U.S. Patent
No. 5,479,638 against all of the defendants. In this action
the Company alleges that PNY and the other defendants infringe
our U.S. Patent Nos. 5,479,638, 5,818,781, 5,907,856,
5,930,815 and 6,145,051. This suit is pending in the United
States District Court for the Northern District of California.
The Company is seeking injunctive relief and damages against all
of the defendants.
Discovery in this case has commenced. This case has been
coordinated with the other patent litigation currently pending.
As discussed above, the current schedule anticipates that
discovery will be completed in the second calendar quarter of
2006. The Court has indicated that it expects to hold a further
status conference in the second half of 2006 at which time it
will rule on the timing and sequence of trial in the various
actions. The Company expects that a trial will take place in one
of the patent actions in late 2006 or the first half of 2007.
Litigation With Willem Vroegh
On February 20, 2004, an individual, Willem Vroegh, sued
the Company, along with Dane-Elec Memory, Fuji, Eastman Kodak
Company, Kingston Technology Company, Inc., Memorex, PNY,
SanDisk Corporation, Verbatim Corporation, and Viking
InterWorks, alleging that the description of the capacity of the
parties’ flash memory cards is false and misleading under
California Business and Professions Code Sections 17200 and
17500. The plaintiff has also asserted allegations for breach of
contract, common law claims of fraud, deceit and
misrepresentation; as well as a violation of the Consumers Legal
Remedies Act, California Civil Code Sec. 175, all arising out of
the same set of facts. Plaintiff seeks restitution,
disgorgement, compensatory damages and injunctive relief and
attorneys’ fees.
In February 2006, the Company and other defendants entered into
a settlement agreement with the plaintiffs, subject to approval
by the Superior Court of the City and County of
San Francisco, pursuant to which the defendants agreed to:
(i) provide class members with either: (A) a cash
refund equal to 5% of the purchase price for each flash memory
device purchased; or (B) a 10% discount towards the
purchase of a new flash memory device; and (ii) make
disclosures on future packaging about the useable capacity of
the defendants’ flash memory devices and (iii) pay up
to $2,400,000 in the aggregate in attorneys’ fees and
expenses to plaintiffs’ counsel. As of December 31,2005, the Company estimated its portion of the attorney’s
fees and expenses along with its estimate of the cost of the
rebate or discount programs to the Company, in connection with
the settlement.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS —
(Continued)
Stockholder Litigation
In March 2006, following the announcement of the Company’s
agreement for the Company to be acquired by Micron Technology,
Inc. in a stock-for-stock merger, the Company, along with its
directors, were named as defendants in several lawsuits
purporting to be class actions in the Superior Court for the
State of California for the County of Alameda. Those actions are
brought allegedly on behalf of a class of plaintiffs who are
holders of our stock and assert claims that the defendants
engaged in self-dealing and breached their fiduciary duties by
agreeing to the merger. Two of the suits also name Micron as a
defendant. The claims are based on allegations that, among other
things, the consideration to be paid to stockholders in the
proposed merger is unfair and inadequate. Plaintiffs seek, among
other things, a declaration that the defendants have breached
their fiduciary duties, injunctive relief (including enjoining
the consummation of the transaction or rescinding the
transaction if consummated), unspecified compensatory and/or
rescissory damages, fees and costs, and other relief.
The Company believes that the claims are without merit and
intends to contest these lawsuits vigorously. At this time, the
Company is unable to reasonably estimate the possible range of
loss for these stockholder litigation matters and, accordingly,
has not recorded any associated liabilities on its consolidated
financial statements at December 31, 2005.
NOTE 15 — RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS:
During the first quarter of 2004, the Company’s Executive
Vice President, Engineering and Chief Technology Officer, repaid
in cash an aggregate of approximately $0.5 million in
outstanding principal and interest due under promissory notes
held by the Company related to stock option exercises by such
stockholder.
NOTE 16 — RECENT ACCOUNTING PRONOUNCEMENTS
In December 2004, the FASB issued SFAS No. 123(R),
“Share-Based Payments”,
(“SFAS No. 123(R)”).
SFAS No. 123(R) requires employee stock options and
rights to purchase shares under stock participation plans to be
accounted for under the fair value method, and eliminates the
ability to account for these instruments under the intrinsic
value method prescribed by APB Opinion No. 25, and allowed
under the original provisions of SFAS No. 123.
SFAS No. 123(R) requires the use of an option pricing
model for estimating fair value, which is amortized to expense
over the service periods. The requirements of
SFAS No. 123(R) are effective for fiscal years
beginning after June 15, 2005. SFAS No. 123(R)
allows for either prospective recognition of compensation
expense or retrospective recognition, which may be back to the
original issuance of SFAS No. 123 or only to interim
periods in the year of adoption. In March 2005, the SEC issued
Staff Accounting Bulletin No. 107, “Share-Based
Payments,” (“SAB 107”). SAB 107
expresses views of the SEC staff regarding the interaction
between SFAS No. 123(R) and certain SEC rules and
regulations and provides the SEC staff’s views regarding
the valuation of share-based payment arrangements for public
companies. Management is currently evaluating the impact of
adopting SFAS No. 123(R). Based on options outstanding
which have been granted through December 31, 2005, the
Company estimates that additional compensation expense will
range from $5.0 million to $7.0 million in 2006 (in
addition to the expense recognition of the unamortized
December 31, 2005 stock-based compensation balance of
$9.4 million) due to the adoption of
SFAS No. 123(R). This estimated impact excludes the
effect of any new options granted or termination taking place
subsequent to December 31, 2005. The overall impact on the
Company’s consolidated financial statements will be
dependent on the option-pricing model used to compute fair value
and the inputs to that model such as volatility and expected
life. Accordingly, actual stock-based compensation expense may
differ materially from the Company’s current estimates.
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS —
(Continued)
In November 2005, the FASB issued FASB Staff Position
(“FSP”) Nos. FAS 115-1 and FAS 124-1,
“The Meaning of Other-Than-Temporary Impairment and Its
Application to Certain Investments,” which provides
guidance on determining when investments in certain debt and
equity securities are considered impaired, whether that
impairment is other-than-temporary, and the measurement of an
impairment loss. This FSP also includes accounting
considerations subsequent to the recognition of an
other-than-temporary impairment and requires certain disclosures
about unrealized losses that have not been recognized as
other-than-temporary impairments. The FSP is required to be
applied to reporting periods beginning after December 15,2005. The Company does not expect the adoption of this FSP in
the first quarter of 2006 will have a material impact on its
consolidated financial statements.
In June 2005, the FASB issued SFAS No. 154,
“Accounting Changes and Error Corrections: a Replacement of
Accounting Principles Board Opinion No. 20 and FASB
Statement No. 3” (“SFAS No. 154”).
SFAS No. 154 requires retrospective application for
voluntary changes in accounting principle unless it is
impracticable to do so. Retrospective application refers to the
application of a different accounting principle to previously
issued financial statements as if that principle had always been
used. SFAS No. 154’s retrospective application
requirement replaces APB No 20’s (“Accounting
Changes”) requirement to recognize most voluntary changes
in accounting principle by including in net income (loss) of the
period of the change the cumulative effect of changing to the
new accounting principle. SFAS No. 154 defines
retrospective application as the application of a different
accounting principle to prior accounting periods as if that
principle had always been used or as the adjustment of
previously issued financial statements to reflect a change in
the reporting entity. SFAS No. 154 also redefines
“restatement” as the revising of previously issued
financial statements to reflect the correction of an error. The
requirements of SFAS No. 154 are effective for
accounting changes made in fiscal years beginning after
December 15, 2005 and will only impact the consolidated
financial statements in periods in which a change in accounting
principle is made.
In December 2004, the FASB issued SFAS No. 153
(“SFAS No. 153”), “Exchanges of
Nonmonetary Assets — an amendment of Accounting
Principles Board Opinion No. 29” (“APB
No. 29” or the “Opinion”). The guidance in
APB No. 29, “Accounting for Nonmonetary
Transactions”, is based on the principle that gains or
losses on exchanges of nonmonetary assets may be recognized
based on the differences in the fair values of the assets
exchanged. The guidance in that Opinion, however, included
certain exceptions to that principle which allowed the asset
received to be recognized at the book value of the asset
surrendered. SFAS No. 153 amends APB No. 29 to
eliminate the exception for nonmonetary exchanges of similar
productive assets and replaces it with a general exception for
“exchanges of nonmonetary assets that do not have
commercial substance”. A nonmonetary exchange has
commercial substance if the future cash flows of the entity are
expected to change significantly as a result of the exchange.
The provisions of SFAS No. 153 should be applied
prospectively, and are effective for the Company for nonmonetary
asset exchanges occurring from the third quarter of 2005.
Earlier application is permitted for nonmonetary asset exchanges
occurring in the Company’s first quarter of 2005. The
adoption of this statement did not have a material impact on the
Company’s consolidated financial statements.
In March 2005, the FASB issued Interpretation No. 47,
“Accounting of Conditional Asset Retirement
Obligations” (“FIN 47”). FIN 47
clarifies that an entity must record a liability for a
“conditional” asset retirement obligation if the fair
value of the obligation can be reasonably estimated. FIN 47
also clarifies when an entity would have sufficient information
to reasonably estimate the fair value of an asset retirement
obligation. FIN 47 is effective no later than the end of
the first reporting period ending after December 15, 2005.
The adoption of FIN 47 in the fourth quarter of 2005 did
not have a material impact on the Company’s consolidated
financial statements.
In November 2004, the FASB issued SFAS No. 151,
“Inventory Costs — an amendment of Accounting
Research Bulletin (“ARB”) No. 43,
Chapter 4” (“ARB No. 43,
Chapter 4”). SFAS No. 151 amends the
guidance in ARB No. 43, Chapter 4, “Inventory
Pricing,” to clarify the accounting for abnormal amounts of
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS —
(Continued)
idle facility expense, freight, handling costs, and wasted
material (spoilage). Paragraph 5 of ARB No. 43,
Chapter 4 previously stated that “. . .
under some circumstances, items such as idle facility expense,
excessive spoilage, double freight, and rehandling costs may be
so abnormal as to require treatment as current period
charges....” SFAS No. 151 requires that those
items be recognized as current-period charges regardless of
whether they meet the criterion of “so abnormal.” In
addition, this Statement requires that allocation of fixed
production overheads to the costs of conversion be based on the
normal capacity of the production facilities.
SFAS No. 151 is effective for the Company for
inventory costs incurred beginning in 2006. The adoption of this
statement did not have a material impact on the Company’s
consolidated financial statements.
NOTE 17 — SUBSEQUENT EVENTS
On March 8, 2006, the Company entered into a definitive
merger agreement with Micron Technology, Inc. and a wholly owned
subsidiary of Micron. The merger agreement provides that, upon
the terms and subject to the conditions provided in the merger
agreement, Micron’s subsidiary will merge with and into the
Company, with the Company being the surviving corporation of the
merger. As a result of the merger: (i) the Company will
become a wholly owned subsidiary of Micron; and (ii) each
outstanding share of the Company’s common stock will be
converted into the right to receive 0.5625 shares of Micron
common stock and Micron will assume stock options held by
employees of the Company at the closing date with a per share
exercise price of $9.00 or lower.
CHANGES IN AND DISAGREEMENTS WITH ACCOUNTANTS ON
ACCOUNTING AND FINANCIAL DISCLOSURE
Not applicable.
ITEM 9A
CONTROLS AND PROCEDURES
Evaluation of Disclosure Controls and Procedures
Regulations under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 require
public companies to maintain “disclosure controls and
procedures,” which are defined as a company’s controls
and other procedures that are designed to ensure that
information required to be disclosed in the reports that it
files or submits under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 is
recorded, processed, summarized and reported, within the time
periods specified in the SEC’s rules and forms and that
such information is accumulated and communicated to the
company’s management, including our Chief Executive Officer
and Chief Financial Officer or persons performing similar
functions, as appropriate, to allow timely decisions regarding
required disclosures. Our President and Chief Executive Officer
and our Chief Financial Officer, based on their evaluation of
the effectiveness of the design and operation of our disclosure
controls and procedures as of the end of the period covered by
this Annual Report on
Form 10-K/ A,
concluded that, as a result of the material weaknesses discussed
below in “Management’s Report on Internal Control Over
Financial Reporting,” our disclosure controls and
procedures were not effective.
Management’s Report on Internal Control Over Financial
Reporting
Our management is responsible for establishing and maintaining
adequate internal control over financial reporting as defined in
Rules 13a-15(f)
and 15d-15(f) under the
Securities Exchange Act of 1934. Our internal control over
financial reporting is a process designed to provide reasonable
assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and
the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in
accordance with generally accepted accounting principles.
Because of its inherent limitations, internal control over
financial reporting may not prevent or detect misstatements.
Also, projections of any evaluation of effectiveness to future
periods are subject to the risk that controls may become
inadequate because of changes in conditions, or that the degree
of compliance with the policies and procedures may deteriorate.
Under the supervision and with the participation of our
management, including our President and Chief Executive Officer
and our Chief Financial Officer, we conducted an evaluation of
the effectiveness of our internal control over financial
reporting as of December 31, 2005 based upon the criteria
issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the
Treadway Commission (COSO) in Internal
Control — Integrated Framework.
A material weakness is a control deficiency, or combination of
control deficiencies, that results in more than a remote
likelihood that a material misstatement of the annual or interim
financial statements will not be prevented or detected. As of
December 31, 2005, management determined the following
material weaknesses existed in our internal control over
financial reporting.
•
Revenue recognition: We did not maintain effective
controls to ensure revenue and deferred revenue were accurately
recorded in accordance with generally accepted accounting
principles. Specifically, we did not maintain effective controls
to accurately: (i) account for all price reductions and
promotional commitments, including rebate programs offered to
customers; (ii) record deferred revenue based on actual
sales price and inventory movements; (iii) record revenue
and inventory adjustments for returns of product by customers;
and (iv) record concessions provided to certain customers
as a reduction of revenue.
•
Accounting for Inventory: We did not maintain effective
controls over the existence and valuation of inventory.
Specifically, we did not maintain effective controls to:
(i) accurately track, confirm and reconcile inventory
movements to ensure the timely recognition of cost of product
revenues; (ii) ensure
the existence of inventory and the appropriate valuation of
returned inventory; (iii) identify and accurately adjust
inventory for excess and slow moving products or components and
record necessary write-downs of inventory to lower of cost or
market; and (iv) accurately accrue for the obligations to
purchase inventory at costs in excess of net realizable value.
These control deficiencies resulted in audit adjustments to
revenues, accounts receivable, cost of product revenues,
deferred revenue, sales related accruals, inventory and
inventory valuation reserves and related accruals in our 2005
consolidated financial statements. Additionally, these control
deficiencies could result in the misstatement of the
aforementioned accounts that would result in a material
misstatement to our annual or interim consolidated financial
statements that would not be prevented or detected. Accordingly,
management has determined that these control deficiencies
constitute material weaknesses.
Because of these material weaknesses, management has concluded
that we did not maintain effective internal control over
financial reporting as of December 31, 2005, based on
criteria in Internal Control — Integrated Framework
issued by the COSO.
Our management’s assessment of the effectiveness of our
internal control over financial reporting as of
December 31, 2005 has been audited by
PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP, an independent registered public
accounting firm, as stated in their report which is included
herein.
Changes in Internal Control Over Financial Reporting
During the fourth quarter ended December 31, 2005, there
were no changes in our internal control over financial reporting
that have materially affected, or are reasonably likely to
materially affect, our internal control over financial reporting.
Management’s Remediation Initiatives
We have taken the following steps toward remediation of the
material weaknesses identified above:
•
Revenue recognition: We have taken the following
remediation actions to ensure revenue and deferred revenue are
accurately recorded in accordance with generally accepted
accounting principles:
•
Instituted controls to review sales related accruals in more
detail by customer and incentive program;
•
Enhanced information technology systems to automate controls and
procedures; and
•
Continued to increase training and awareness to sales and
marketing representatives on our processes and procedures.
•
Accounting for inventory: We have taken the following
remediation actions to improve our internal control over the
existence and valuation of inventory:
•
Performance of monthly reconciliations of inventory movements
and period end inventory on hand to information obtained from
our subcontractors and resellers;
•
Performance of additional and more frequent inventory
observations to validate the existence of inventory recorded in
our financial reporting systems;
•
Increased management oversight of the analysis and review of
inventory valuation reserves; and
•
Enhanced information technology systems to automate controls and
procedures.
We believe that these corrective actions, taken as a whole, when
fully implemented, will mitigate the control deficiencies
identified above. However, we will continue to monitor the
effectiveness of these actions and will make any changes that
management determines appropriate.
Assistant Professor at the Harvard Business School
2003
2007
William T. Doddshas served as a member of our board of
directors since February 1998. Since February 1980,
Mr. Dodds has been a Vice President of The Woodbridge
Company Limited, a Toronto, Canada based holding company. The
Woodbridge Company Limited owns a majority interest in The
Thomson Corporation, an information publishing company.
Mr. Dodds is also Vice President and Secretary of Thomvest
Holdings LLC, a venture capital firm. Mr. Dodds also serves
on the boards of directors of several private companies.
Mr. Dodds holds a B.A. in economics from the University of
Waterloo and has a Canadian Chartered Accountant’s
Designation. Mr. Dodds is the chairperson of our audit
committee.
Petro Estakhrihas served as our Chief Technology Officer
since April 1999 and as our Executive Vice President,
Engineering since August 1997. Mr. Estakhri has served as a
member of our board of directors since August 1997, and was the
Chairman of our board of directors from August 1997 to July
2001. Mr. Estakhri also served as our Vice President,
Systems from September 1996 to August 1997. From January 1993 to
August 1996, Mr. Estakhri served as the Senior Director of
Mass Storage Controller Engineering at Cirrus Logic, Inc., a
supplier of semiconductors for Internet entertainment
electronics. Mr. Estakhri is a co-author of many patents
related to magnetic media, flash storage controller and systems
architecture. Mr. Estakhri holds a B.S. and an M.S. in
electrical and computer engineering from the University of
California at Davis.
Robert C. Hinckleyhas served as a member of our board of
directors since April 2003. Since October 2001,
Mr. Hinckley has been independently employed. From
September 1999 to October 2001, Mr. Hinckley served as an
adviser to Xilinx, Inc., a supplier of programmable logic
solutions. From November 1991 to September 1999,
Mr. Hinckley was Vice President, Strategic Plans and
Programs, General Counsel and Secretary of Xilinx, and in 1994
was the company’s Chief Operating Officer. From 1988 to
1990, Mr. Hinckley was the Senior Vice President and Chief
Financial Officer of Spectra Physics, Inc., a supplier of laser
products. Mr. Hinckley serves on the boards of directors of
several private companies. Mr. Hinckley holds a B.S. in
engineering from the U.S. Naval Academy and a J.D. from
Tulane University Law School.
Mr. Hinckley is a member of our audit committee and the
chairperson of our governance and nominating committee.
Brian D. Jacobshas served as Lead Director of our board
of directors since March 2003 and as a member of our board of
directors since February 1998. Mr. Jacobs is the founder
and Managing General Partner of Emergence Capital Partners, a
venture capital firm. Prior to founding Emergence Capital
Partners in January 2003, Mr. Jacobs was a general partner
and Executive Vice President of St. Paul Venture Capital, Inc.,
a venture capital firm, since 1992. Mr. Jacobs serves on
the boards of directors of several private companies.
Mr. Jacobs hold a B.S. and an M.S. in mechanical
engineering from the Massachusetts Institute of Technology and
an M.B.A. from Stanford University. Mr. Jacobs is the
chairperson of our compensation committee and a member of our
governance and nominating committee.
Charles E. Levine has served as a member of our board of
directors since June 2004. Mr. Levine retired in September
2002 from his position as President of Sprint PCS, a wireless
communications company. From January 1997 to September 2002,
Mr. Levine held various positions with Sprint PCS. From
October 1994 to September 1996, he served as President of Octel
Link, a voice mail equipment and services provider, and as a
Senior Vice President of Octel Services, a provider of voice
systems services. Mr. Levine also serves on the boards of
directors of At Road, Inc., a wireless applications provider,
Sierra Wireless Inc., a wireless solutions provider, Somera
Communications, a provider of telecommunications infrastructure
equipment and services, and Viisage Technology Inc., a
biometrics and computer networks company. Mr. Levine holds
a B.A. in economics from Trinity College and an M.B.A. from the
Kellogg School of Management at Northwestern University.
Mr. Levine is a member of our audit committee and our
compensation committee.
Eric B. Stanghas served as the Chairman of our board of
directors since April 2003, as President and Chief Executive
Officer since July 2001 and as a member of our board of
directors since January 2000. Mr. Stang previously served
as our Chief Operating Officer from the time he joined us in
November 1999 until July 2001. From June 1998 to November 1999,
Mr. Stang was Vice President and General Manager of the
Radiation Therapy Products Division of ADAC Laboratories, a
medical equipment and software company. From April 1990 to May
1998, he worked for Raychem Corporation, a material science
company, where his last position was Director of Operations and
Division Manager, Materials Division. Prior to joining Raychem,
Mr. Stang co-founded Monitor Company Europe Limited, an
international strategic consulting firm, and worked for
McKinsey & Company as a management consultant.
Mr. Stang holds a B.A. in economics from Stanford
University and an M.B.A. from the Harvard Business School.
Mary Tripsashas served as a member of our board of
directors since April 2003. Since July 1999, Ms. Tripsas
has been an Assistant Professor of Business Administration at
the Harvard Business School. From July 1995 to June 1996,
Ms. Tripsas was a lecturer, and from July 1996 to June
1999, an Assistant Professor of Management at the Wharton School
at the University of Pennsylvania. Ms. Tripsas holds a B.S.
from the University of Illinois at Urbana, an M.B.A. from the
Harvard Business School and a Ph.D. from the MIT Sloan School of
Management. Ms. Tripsas is a member of our compensation
committee and our governance and nominating committee.
The following table sets forth information regarding our
executive officers as of March 29, 2006, except for
Messrs. Stang and Estakhri whose biographical information
is set forth above under “Directors”:
Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer
Eric S. Whitaker
39
Executive Vice President, Corporate Strategy, General Counsel
and Corporate Secretary
Mark W. Adams joined Lexar as Chief Operating Officer in
January 2006. Mr. Adams was most recently Vice President of
Sales and Marketing at Creative Labs, Inc., a provider of
digital entertainment products. Mr. Adams joined Creative
Labs in January 2003 and was responsible for the company’s
business in the Americas region. Previously, he was Chief
Executive Officer of Coresma Inc., a designer and marketer of
broadband access systems and consumer premise devices for cable
networks, from March 2000 to December 2002, and prior to that
Vice President of Sales for Creative Labs from April 1999 to
March 2000 in his first tenure with the company. Mr. Adams
holds a B.S. in economics from Boston College and a M.A. in
business administration from Harvard University.
Michael P. Scarpellijoined Lexar as Executive Vice
President and Chief Financial Officer in January 2006. Most
recently, Mr. Scarpelli was Chief Financial Officer,
Treasurer, Senior Vice President of Administration and Secretary
of HPL Technologies, Inc., a provider of yield management
software and test chip solutions, from July 2002 until its
acquisition by Synopsys, Inc. in December 2005.
Mr. Scarpelli joined HPL in January 2002 as Vice President
of Corporate Development, responsible for HPL’s mergers and
acquisitions function. Prior to joining HPL, Mr. Scarpelli
was an auditor with PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP from 1989, and an
audit partner beginning in 1998. Mr. Scarpelli holds a B.A.
in economics from the University of Western Ontario and is a
Certified Public Accountant and a Chartered Accountant.
Eric S. Whitaker has served as our Executive Vice
President, Corporate Strategy since January 2005 and as our
General Counsel and Corporate Secretary since April 2000.
Mr. Whitaker previously served as our Director of Legal
Affairs from December 1999 until April 2000, as our Vice
President, Technology Licensing from November 2000 through April
2004 and as our Vice President, Corporate Strategy from April
2004 through January 2005. From October 1995 to December 1999,
Mr. Whitaker was in private law practice with
Latham & Watkins LLP. Mr. Whitaker holds a B.A. in
politics from Princeton University and a J.D. from Stanford Law
School.
Audit Committee and Audit Committee Financial Expert
We have a separately-designated audit committee of the board of
directors. The current members of the audit committee are
William T. Dodds, Robert C. Hinckley and Charles E. Levine.
Mr. Levine was appointed to the audit committee in June
2005 in connection with the rotation of Mary Tripsas from the
audit committee. Messrs. Dodds, Hinckley and Levine are
each independent directors as defined in the Securities Exchange
Act of 1934, as amended, and applicable rules of The Nasdaq
Stock Market. Our board of directors has determined that
Messrs. Dodds and Hinckley are each an “audit
committee financial expert” as defined by SEC rules.
Section 16 of the Securities Exchange Act requires our
directors and officers, and persons who own more than 10% of a
registered class of our equity securities, to file initial
reports of ownership and reports of changes
in ownership with the SEC. SEC regulations also require these
persons to furnish us with a copy of all Section 16(a)
forms they file. Based solely on our review of the copies of the
forms furnished to us and written representations from our
executive officers and directors, we believe that all
Section 16(a) filing requirements were met during 2005,
with the exception of Eric Stang, who filed a Form 5 for an
option to purchase 200,000 shares of common stock
granted in June 2005 which was not timely reported on a
Form 4; Petro Estakhri, who filed a Form 5 for an
option to purchase 200,000 shares of common stock
granted in June 2005 which was not timely reported on a
Form 4; and Eric Whitaker, who filed a Form 5 for an
option to purchase 125,000 shares of common stock
granted in June 2005 which was not timely reported on a
Form 4.
Code of Ethics
We and our board of directors are committed to promoting high
standards of ethical business conduct. Our Code of Conduct and
Ethics is applicable to all of the representatives of our
company, including our executive officers and all other
employees of our company and our subsidiary companies, as well
as to our directors. A copy of our Code is available on the
governance section of the investor relations page of our website
(www.lexar.com). Any substantive amendments to the Code
and any grant of a waiver from a provision of the Code requiring
disclosure under applicable SEC or Nasdaq Stock Market rules
will be disclosed on our website. Please note that none of the
information on our website is incorporated by reference in this
document.
Stockholder Recommendation of Board Nominees
Since the date of our proxy statement in connection with our
2005 Annual Meeting of Stockholders, there have been no changes
to the procedures by which security holders may recommend
nominees to our board of directors.
ITEM 11.
EXECUTIVE COMPENSATION
Summary Compensation Table
The following table presents information about the compensation
awarded to, earned by or paid to (1) our Chief Executive
Officer, and (2) our three other executive officers as of
December 31, 2005 whose
salary and bonus for fiscal 2005 was more than $100,000. We do
not grant stock appreciation rights and have no long-term
compensation benefits other than stock options.
In accordance with SEC rules, the compensation described in this
table does not include certain perquisites and other personal
benefits received by the named executive officers that do not
exceed the lesser of $50,000 or 10% of any such officer’s
salary and bonus disclosed in this table.
(2)
These amounts include supplemental payments made by us to our
employees, including the named executive officers, in an amount
equal to approximately 2% of each such employee’s annual
salary. Such amounts can be used, at each employee’s
discretion, to pay for a variety of health benefits that we
offer to our employees.
(3)
Mr. McGee joined us on May 19, 2003.
Mr. McGee’s initial annual base salary was $200,000.
(4)
Includes $100,000 in discretionary incentive compensation paid
to Mr. Whitaker.
Option Grants in Fiscal 2005
The following table sets forth grants of stock options made
during 2005 to each executive officer named in the Summary
Compensation Table. In accordance with SEC rules, the table sets
forth the hypothetical gains or “option spreads” that
would exist for the options at the end of their respective terms
based on assumed annual rates of compound stock price
appreciation of 5% and 10% from the dates the options were
granted to the end of the respective option terms. The 5% and
10% assumed annual rates of stock price appreciation do not
reflect our estimate or projections of future stock price
growth. Actual gains, if any, on option exercises depend on the
future performance of our common stock and overall market
conditions. The potential realizable values shown in this table
may never be achieved.
Specifically, potential realizable values are calculated by:
•
Multiplying the number of shares of common stock subject to a
given option by the exercise price per share of our common stock
on the date of grant;
Assuming that the aggregate option exercise price derived from
that calculation compounds at the annual 5% or 10% rates shown
in the table for the entire ten-year term of the option; and
•
Subtracting from that result the aggregate option exercise price.
The options shown in the table were granted at fair market
value, are incentive stock options (to the extent permitted
under the Internal Revenue Code) and will expire ten years from
the date of grant. The shares vest and become exercisable as to
12.5% of the shares on the six-month anniversary of the date of
grant, and an additional 1/48th of the total number of
shares vest and become exercisable each month thereafter so long
as the executive officer remains employed by us. Options are
subject to earlier termination upon termination of the option
holder’s employment and to acceleration of vesting in
connection with a change in control of Lexar, as described in
“Employment Contracts, Termination of Employment and
Change-In-Control Arrangements.”
(2)
The percentage of total options granted to employees in 2005 is
based on options to purchase an aggregate of
2,368,150 shares of our common stock granted to employees
during 2005.
Aggregated Option Exercises in Fiscal 2005 and Fiscal
Year-End Option Values
The following table sets forth for each executive officer named
in the Summary Compensation Table: (1) the number of shares
covered by both exercisable and unexercisable stock options as
of December 30, 2005 and (2) the value of
“in-the-money”
stock options. None of the executive officers named in the
Summary Compensation Table exercised stock options during 2005.
On December 7, 2005, our board of directors approved the
acceleration of the vesting of all then-outstanding stock
options held by our employees, including our executive officers,
with an exercise price above $9.50 such that these options
became immediately exercisable as of December 7, 2005. In
connection with such vesting acceleration and in order to
preserve the long-term incentive characteristic of these stock
options, we imposed restrictions on the resale of the underlying
shares acquired upon exercise of the options such that the
underlying shares may not be sold, transferred, encumbered or
“hedged” until the option would otherwise have vested
pursuant to the original vesting terms. The decision to
accelerate the vesting of these stock options was made primarily
to reduce compensation
expense that otherwise would be recorded in future periods
following our adoption in the first quarter of 2006 of
SFAS No. 123(R), “Share-Based Payment.”
(2)
Represents the positive difference between the exercise price of
the outstanding stock option and the fair market value of the
shares subject to the option as of December 30, 2005.
(3)
The fair market value is based on $8.21 per share, which
was the closing price of our common stock as reported on the
Nasdaq National Market on December 30, 2005.
Employment Contracts, Termination of Employment and
Change-in-Control
Arrangements
All of our employees are at-will employees, which means that
either we or our employees may terminate the employment
relationship at any time for any reason.
Eric B. Stang. We entered into an employment offer letter
on November 8, 1999 with Eric B. Stang, our President and
Chief Executive Officer and former Chief Operating Officer. This
letter established Mr. Stang’s initial annual base
salary at $200,000 and his eligibility for a bonus based upon
his achievement of specified performance goals.
Mr. Stang’s annual base salary for 2005 was $400,000.
The offer letter also provided for Mr. Stang’s
election to the board of directors.
Following Mr. Stang’s appointment as our President and
Chief Executive Officer on July 19, 2001, we entered into a
retention agreement with Mr. Stang on October 22, 2001
that was effective as of September 1, 2001. Pursuant to the
terms of this retention agreement, if we terminate
Mr. Stang’s employment without cause or if he
voluntarily resigns following a constructive termination event
in the absence of a change in control, we must continue to pay
his base salary and medical and life insurance benefits for
twelve months. In addition, we must pay him his annual target
bonus of 50% of his salary, pro-rated up to the date of
termination, provided that he would have earned such bonus
absent his termination. Additionally, all stock options or
restricted stock granted to or purchased by him on or before
September 1, 2001 will vest immediately, followed by a
12 month period during which the options may be exercised.
With respect to any stock options granted after
September 2, 2001, Mr. Stang will receive an
additional 24 months of vesting, followed by a
12 month period during which the options may be exercised.
Mr. Stang will also be entitled to retain any cellular
phone, notebook computer and camera equipment as then currently
provided to him immediately prior to his termination. Finally,
Mr. Stang will have 18 months within which to repay
any outstanding notes that he entered into with us.
The retention agreement also provides that, in the event of a
change in control of Lexar, Mr. Stang will receive a cash
bonus of $260,000. In addition, 25% of all unvested stock
options and restricted stock granted to or purchased by
Mr. Stang prior to the change in control will vest
immediately and shall remain exercisable (1) for six months
following such acceleration or (2) pursuant to the terms of
the original grant agreement, whichever period is greater. The
remaining 75% of such unvested stock options and restricted
stock shall vest nine months after the change in control and
shall remain exercisable (1) for six months following such
acceleration or (2) pursuant to the terms of the original
grant agreement, whichever period is greater. In addition, if,
during the period commencing one month prior to the change in
control of Lexar and continuing for 18 months thereafter,
Mr. Stang is terminated without cause or voluntarily
resigns following a constructive termination event, he will
receive his base salary and medical and life insurance benefits
for 15 months. In addition, he will receive his annual
target bonus of 50% of his salary, pro-rated up to the date of
termination, regardless of whether he would have earned any such
bonus prior to his termination. Additionally, all stock options
and restricted stock granted to or purchased by him after the
change in control will vest immediately, followed by a six-month
period during which the options may be exercised. Mr. Stang
will also be entitled to retain any cellular phone, notebook
computer and camera equipment as then currently provided to him
immediately prior to his termination. Furthermore,
Mr. Stang will have 18 months within which to repay
any outstanding notes that he entered into with us. Finally, in
the event that any portion of the amounts payable to
Mr. Stang is subject to the excise tax imposed by
Section 4999 of the Internal Revenue Code, we will pay him
the amount, not to exceed $150,000, necessary to place him in
the same after-tax position as he would have been in had no
excise tax been imposed.
Petro Estakhri. We entered into an employment agreement
on September 19, 1996 with Petro Estakhri, our Chief
Technology Officer and Executive Vice President, Engineering.
This agreement established Mr. Estakhri’s initial
annual base salary at $125,000. Mr. Estakhri’s annual
base salary for 2005 was $400,000.
On November 9, 2001, we entered into a retention agreement
with Mr. Estakhri that was effective as of
September 1, 2001. Pursuant to the terms of this retention
agreement, if we terminate Mr. Estakhri’s employment
without cause or if he voluntarily resigns following a
constructive termination event in the absence of a change in
control, we must continue to pay his base salary and medical and
life insurance benefits for 12 months. In addition, we must
pay him his annual target bonus of 50% of his salary, pro-rated
up to the date of termination, provided that he would have
earned such bonus absent his termination. Additionally, all
stock options granted to him on or before September 1, 2001
will vest immediately, followed by a 12 month period during
which the options may be exercised. With respect to any stock
options granted after September 2, 2001, Mr. Estakhri
will receive an additional 18 months of vesting, followed
by a 12 month period during which the options may be
exercised. Mr. Estakhri will also be entitled to retain any
cellular phone and notebook computer as then currently provided
to him immediately prior to his termination. Finally,
Mr. Estakhri will have 18 months within which to repay
any outstanding notes that he entered into with Lexar.
The retention agreement also provides that, in the event of a
change in control of Lexar, Mr. Estakhri will receive a
cash bonus of $325,000. In addition, 25% of all unvested stock
options and restricted stock granted to or purchased by
Mr. Estakhri prior to the change in control will vest
immediately and shall remain exercisable (1) for six months
following such acceleration or (2) pursuant to the terms of
the original grant agreement, whichever period is greater. The
remaining 75% of such unvested stock options and restricted
stock shall vest nine months after the change in control and
shall remain exercisable (1) for six months following such
acceleration or (2) pursuant to the terms of the original
grant agreement, whichever period is greater. In addition, if,
during the period commencing one month prior to the change in
control of Lexar and continuing for 18 months thereafter,
Mr. Estakhri is terminated without cause or voluntarily
resigns following a constructive termination event, he will
receive his base salary for 15 months and medical and life
insurance benefits for 12 months. In addition, he will
receive his annual target bonus of 50% of his salary, pro-rated
up to the date of termination, regardless of whether he would
have earned any such bonus prior to his termination.
Additionally, all stock options granted to or purchased by him
before or after the change in control and all restricted stock
purchased by him after the change in control will vest
immediately, followed by a six-month period during which the
options may be exercised. Mr. Estakhri will also be
entitled to retain any cellular phone and notebook computer as
then currently provided to him immediately prior to his
termination. Furthermore, Mr. Estakhri will have
18 months within which to repay any outstanding notes that
he executed with Lexar. Finally, in the event that any portion
of the amounts payable to Mr. Estakhri is subject to the
excise tax imposed by Section 4999 of the Internal Revenue
Code, we will pay him the amount, not to exceed $150,000,
necessary to place him in the same after-tax position as he
would have been in had no excise tax been imposed.
Brian T. McGee. We entered into an employment offer
letter on April 21, 2003 with Mr. McGee for him to
serve as our Vice President, Finance and Chief Financial
Officer. This employment offer letter established
Mr. McGee’s initial annual base salary at $200,000 and
his eligibility for a bonus based upon his achievement of
specified performance goals. Mr. McGee’s annual salary
for 2005 was $240,000. The terms of this offer letter provided
that, if we terminate Mr. McGee’s employment without
cause, we must continue to pay his base salary for six months.
The offer letter also provides that, in the event of a change in
control of Lexar, 50% of all unvested stock options granted to
Mr. McGee will vest upon the earlier to occur of
(1) Mr. McGee’s termination without cause
following a change in control or (2) the nine month
anniversary of the change in control.
On January 16, 2006, in connection with the transition of
Mr. McGee from Vice President, Finance and Chief Financial
Officer to Vice President, Corporate Development, we entered
into an amendment to Mr. McGee’s offer letter.
Pursuant to the terms of this amendment, if we terminate
Mr. McGee’s employment without cause before
August 1, 2006 or if he voluntarily resigns between
May 1, 2006 and August 1, 2006, we must continue to
pay his base salary and medical and life insurance benefits for
six months. In addition, we must pay him six months of his
annual target bonus of 40% of his salary. Additionally,
the stock option granted to him on May 20, 2003 will vest
immediately, followed by a three-month period during which the
option may be exercised.
Mr. McGee’s employment with us terminated on
March 24, 2006.
Eric S. Whitaker. We entered into an employment offer
letter on December 17, 1999 with Eric S. Whitaker for him
to serve as our Assistant General Counsel and Director of Legal
Affairs. Mr. Whitaker has served as our General Counsel and
Corporate Secretary since April 2000, our Vice President,
Technology Licensing from November 2000 to January 2005 and our
Executive Vice President, Corporate Strategy since January 2005.
This offer letter established Mr. Whitaker’s initial
annual base salary at $125,000 and his eligibility for a bonus
based upon his achievement of specified performance goals.
Mr. Whitaker’s annual base salary for 2005 was
$300,000.
On October 22, 2001, we entered into a retention agreement
with Mr. Whitaker that was effective as of
September 1, 2001. Pursuant to the terms of this retention
agreement, if we terminate Mr. Whitaker’s employment
without cause or if he voluntarily resigns following a
constructive termination event in the absence of a change in
control, we must continue to pay his base salary and medical and
life insurance benefits for six months. In addition, we must pay
him his annual target bonus of 40% of his salary, pro-rated up
to the date of termination, provided that he would have earned
such bonus absent his termination. Additionally, with respect to
all stock options or restricted stock granted to or purchased by
Mr. Whitaker as of the date of his termination, he will be
granted an additional twelve months of vesting, followed by a
12 month period during which the options may be exercised.
Mr. Whitaker will also be entitled to retain any cellular
phone, notebook computer and camera equipment as then currently
provided to him immediately prior to his termination. Finally,
Mr. Whitaker will have 18 months within which to repay
any outstanding notes that he entered into with Lexar.
The retention agreement also provides that, in the event of a
change in control of Lexar, Mr. Whitaker will receive a
cash bonus of $125,000. In addition, 25% of all unvested stock
options and restricted stock granted to or purchased by
Mr. Whitaker prior to the change in control will vest
immediately and shall remain exercisable (1) for six months
following such acceleration or (2) pursuant to the terms of
the original grant agreement, whichever period is greater. The
remaining 75% of such unvested stock options and restricted
stock shall vest nine months after the change in control and
shall remain exercisable (1) for six months following such
acceleration or (2) pursuant to the terms of the original
grant agreement, whichever period is greater. In addition, if,
during the period commencing one month prior to the change in
control of Lexar and continuing for 18 months thereafter,
Mr. Whitaker is terminated without cause or voluntarily
resigns following a constructive termination event, he will
receive his base salary and medical and life insurance benefits
for 12 months. In addition, he will receive his annual
target bonus of 40% of his salary, pro-rated up to the date of
termination, regardless of whether he would have earned any such
bonus prior to his termination. Additionally, all stock options
or restricted stock granted to or purchased by him as of the
date of his termination will vest immediately, followed by a
six-month period during which the options may be exercised.
Mr. Whitaker will also be entitled to retain any cellular
phone and notebook computer as then currently provided to him
immediately prior to his termination. Furthermore,
Mr. Whitaker will have 18 months within which to repay
any outstanding notes that he entered into with us. Finally, in
the event that any portion of the amounts payable to
Mr. Whitaker is subject to the excise tax imposed by
Section 4999 of the Internal Revenue Code, we will pay him
the amount, not to exceed $150,000, necessary to place him in
the same after-tax position as he would have been in had no
excise tax been imposed.
On January 17, 2006, we entered into an amendment to the
retention agreement with Mr. Whitaker. In exchange for
Mr. Whitaker’s agreement to remain an employee of
Lexar and to provide at least 100 hours of consulting
services to Lexar for a six-month period following his
resignation, if Mr. Whitaker voluntarily resigns following
June 1, 2006, we will provide him the same benefits to
which he would otherwise be entitled under his retention
agreement for involuntary termination without cause or his
voluntary resignation after a constructive termination event.
employment offer letter established Mr. Scarpelli’s
initial annual base salary at $260,000 and his eligibility for a
bonus based upon his achievement of specified performance goals.
Pursuant to the terms of this offer letter, if we terminate
Mr. Scarpelli’s employment without cause, we must
continue to pay his base salary for six months. In addition, if
we terminate Mr. Scarpelli’s employment without cause
absent a change in control of Lexar, 50% of all unvested stock
options granted to Mr. Scarpelli will vest as of the date
of his termination.
The offer letter also provides that, at the effective time of a
change in control of Lexar, and provided that Mr. Scarpelli
continues in the employment of the acquiring company, as set
forth in the 2000 Equity Incentive Plan, 25% of the unvested
portion of the options to purchase 250,000 shares of
Lexar common stock granted to Mr. Scarpelli in accordance
with the offer letter will accelerate and become immediately
exercisable. If Mr. Scarpelli is terminated without cause
within one year of the effective time of the change in control,
an additional 25% of the unvested shares subject to such stock
option (making 50% in total) will accelerate and become
immediately exercisable. In addition, if the effective time of
the change in control is before January 16, 2007 (Mr.
Scarpelli’s one-year anniversary with Lexar) and
Mr. Scarpelli’s vested options at the effective time
of the change in control do not represent at least $200,000 of
gain to him, Mr. Scarpelli will receive a cash payment
equal to the amount required to provide him with a total gain of
$200,000.
Mark W. Adams. We entered into an employment offer letter
on December 14, 2005 with Mark W. Adams for him to serve as
our Chief Operating Officer. This employment offer letter
established Mr. Adams’ initial annual base salary at
$250,000 and his eligibility for a bonus based upon his
achievement of specified performance goals.
Pursuant to the terms of this offer letter, if we terminate
Mr. Adams’ employment without cause, we must continue
to pay his base salary for nine months, or until he commences
full time employment, whichever comes first.
The offer letter also provides that, at the effective time of a
change in control of Lexar, and provided that Mr. Adams
continues in the employment of the acquiring company, as set
forth in the 2000 Equity Incentive Plan, 25% of the unvested
portion of the options to purchase 300,000 shares of
Lexar common stock granted to Mr. Adams in accordance with
the offer letter will accelerate and become immediately
exercisable. If Mr. Adams is terminated without cause
within one year of the effective time of the change in control,
an additional 25% of the unvested shares subject to such stock
option (making 50% in total) will accelerate and become
immediately exercisable. In addition, if the effective time of
the change in control is before January 4, 2007 (Mr.
Adams’ one-year anniversary with Lexar) and
Mr. Adams’ vested options at the effective time of the
change in control do not represent at least $200,000 of gain to
him, Mr. Adams will receive a cash payment equal to the
amount required to provide him with a total gain of $200,000.
Option Plans. In addition to the employment arrangements
described above, our 2000 Equity Incentive Plan also provides
for accelerated vesting upon a change in control of Lexar. Under
the 2000 Equity Incentive Plan, upon a change in control, 25% of
all unvested stock options and restricted stock granted pursuant
to such plan automatically vest in full, and the remaining
options outstanding under the Plan will continue to vest in
equal monthly installments over the remaining original vesting
term. Further, pursuant to the stock option agreements under our
2000 Equity Incentive Plan for three of our executive officers,
Eric B. Stang, Petro Estakhri and Eric S. Whitaker, in the event
of the termination of such executive officer without cause, or
if the executive officer terminates his employment for good
reason, within one year of the effective time of a change in
control of Lexar, all unvested stock options granted to the
executive officer pursuant to the 2000 Equity Incentive Plan
will become 100% vested.
Our non-employee directors receive cash compensation for their
services as directors and are reimbursed for their reasonable
and necessary expenses in attending board and committee
meetings. In 2005, each non-employee director received the
following cash compensation:
Annual Cash
Role
Retainer By Role(1)
Board Member
$
25,000
Audit Committee Member
10,000
Compensation Committee Member
5,000
Governance and Nominating Committee Member
5,000
Audit Committee Chair
15,000
Compensation Committee Chair
7,500
Governance and Nominating Committee Chair
7,500
Lead Director
7,500
(1)
These cash amounts are additive with respect to each role
performed by the applicable director. For example, if a director
serves on our board of directors, as chairperson of the audit
committee and as a member of the compensation committee, he or
she will receive an annual cash retainer in the amount of
$55,000 ($25,000 as a board member, $10,000 as an audit
committee member, $15,000 as audit committee chairperson and
$5,000 as a compensation committee member).
In addition, each non-employee director is eligible to receive
automatic and non-discretionary grants under our 2000 Equity
Incentive Plan. Each non-employee director who becomes a member
of our board of directors will be granted an option to
purchase 50,000 shares of our common stock as of the
date the director becomes a member of the board. Immediately
after each annual meeting of our stockholders, each non-employee
director will automatically be granted an additional option to
purchase a certain number of shares of our common stock if the
director has served continuously as a member of our board since
the date of the director’s initial grant and for a period
of at least one year before the annual meeting. On
February 10, 2006, our board of directors amended the 2000
Equity Incentive Plan to reduce this number of shares from
25,000 shares to 20,000 shares. The board may also
make discretionary supplemental grants to a non-employee
director who has served for less than one year from the date of
such director’s initial grant; provided that no such
director may receive options to purchase more than a certain
number of shares of our common stock in any calendar year
pursuant to the above-described provisions of our 2000 Equity
Incentive Plan. On February 10, 2006, our board of
directors amended the 2000 Equity Incentive Plan to reduce this
number of shares from 75,000 shares to 70,000 shares.
Each option granted to a director under our 2000 Equity
Incentive Plan has a 10 year term and will terminate three
months after the date the director ceases to be a director or
consultant for any reason except death, disability or cause,
12 months if the termination is due to death or disability
or immediately if the termination is for cause. The options will
vest and become exercisable as to 25% of the shares on the
one-year anniversary of the date of grant and as to 2.0833% of
the shares each month thereafter, so long as the non-employee
director remains a director or consultant. In the event of our
liquidation or dissolution or a change in control transaction,
the options granted to each non-employee director under this
plan will become fully vested and exercisable, followed by a
three-month period during which the options may be exercised.
Any options not exercised within such three-month period will
expire.
In June 2005, upon completion of our 2005 annual meeting of
stockholders, we granted each of William T. Dodds, Robert C.
Hinckley, Brian D. Jacobs, Charles E. Levine and Mary Tripsas a
nonqualified stock option to purchase 25,000 shares of
our common stock at an exercise price of $5.68 per share,
which grant was automatically made pursuant to the terms of our
2000 Equity Incentive Plan.
Compensation Committee Interlocks and Insider
Participation
The compensation committee currently consists of Brian D.
Jacobs, Charles E. Levine and Mary Tripsas. During fiscal 2005,
William T. Dodds and John A. Rollwagen also served as members of
our compensation committee. Each is, or was during his or her
term on the compensation committee, a non-employee director
within the meaning of
Rule 16b-3 of the
Securities Exchange Act of 1934 and an “outside
director” within the meaning of Section 162(m) of the
Internal Revenue Code. None of these directors has at any time
since our formation (1) been one of our officers or
employees nor (2) had any other interlocking relationships
as defined by the SEC. None of our executive officers currently
serves or in the past has served as a member of the board of
directors or compensation committee of any entity that has one
or more executive officers serving on our board or compensation
committee.
ITEM 12.
SECURITY OWNERSHIP OF CERTAIN BENEFICIAL OWNERS AND
MANAGEMENT AND RELATED STOCKHOLDER MATTERS
Equity Compensation Plan Information
The table below provides information as of December 31,2005 with respect to compensation plans under which our equity
securities are authorized for issuance.
Number of Securities
Number of Securities
To Be Issued Upon
Weighted-Average
Remaining Available
Exercise of
Exercise Price of
for Future Issuance
Outstanding
Outstanding
Under Equity
Plan Category
Options and Rights
Options and Rights
Compensation Plans
Equity compensation plans approved by security holders
19,758,706
$
6.1553
4,951,529
(1)(2)
Equity compensation plans not approved by security holders
—
—
—
Total
19,758,706
$
6.1553
4,951,529
(1)
Represents shares subject to outstanding options issued under
our 2000 Equity Incentive Plan and our 1996 Stock Option/ Stock
Issuance Plan.
(2)
Represents 2,744,838 shares reserved for issuance under our
2000 Equity Incentive Plan and 2,206,691 shares reserved
for issuance under our 2000 Employee Stock Purchase Plan. Under
the terms of the 2000 Equity Incentive Plan, the number of
shares of our common stock reserved for issuance under the plan
will increase automatically on January 1 of each year by an
amount equal to 5% of our total outstanding shares of common
stock as of the immediately preceding December 31. Under
the terms of the 2000 Employee Stock Purchase Plan, the number
of shares of our common stock reserved for issuance under the
plan will increase automatically on January 1 of each year by an
amount equal to 1% of our total outstanding shares of common
stock as of the immediately preceding December 31.
(3)
All of the 2,744,838 shares reserved for issuance under our
2000 Equity Incentive Plan are available for grant as restricted
stock or stock bonuses. To date, we have not granted restricted
stock or stock bonuses under this plan.
Beneficial Ownership Table
The following table presents information about the beneficial
ownership of our common stock as of March 29, 2006 by:
•
each person or entity known by us to be the beneficial owner of
more than 5% of our common stock;
•
each of our directors;
•
each executive officer named in the Summary Compensation Table
above; and
The percentage of beneficial ownership for the table is based on
approximately 82,441,604 shares of our common stock
outstanding as of March 29, 2006. To our knowledge, except
under community property laws or as otherwise noted, the persons
and entities named in the table have sole voting and sole
investment power over their shares of our common stock. Unless
otherwise indicated, each entity or person listed below
maintains a mailing address of c/o Lexar Media, Inc., 47300
Bayside Parkway, Fremont, California94538.
The number of shares beneficially owned by each stockholder is
determined under SEC rules and is not necessarily indicative of
beneficial ownership for any other purpose. Under these rules,
beneficial ownership includes those shares of common stock over
which the stockholder has sole or shared voting or investment
power. It also includes shares of common stock that the
stockholder has the right to acquire within 60 days after
March 29, 2006 through the exercise of any option or
warrant. The percentage ownership of the common stock, however,
is based on the assumption, required by SEC rules, that only the
person or entity whose ownership is being reported has converted
options or warrants into shares of our common stock.
Our current executive officers and directors and two entities
affiliated with one of our directors have entered into voting
agreements, dated as of March 8, 2006, with Micron
Technology, Inc., or Micron, in connection with the proposed
merger described above in the section entitled, “Proposed
Acquisition by Micron Technology, Inc.”
Includes options to purchase 2,030,751 shares of our
common stock that are exercisable within 60 days of
March 29, 2006, of which 401,667 shares are subject to
stock options whose vesting was fully accelerated on
December 7, 2005, but which shares may not be sold,
transferred, encumbered or “hedged” until the option
would otherwise have vested pursuant to the original vesting
terms.
(2)
Includes 1,076,284 shares of our common stock held jointly
by Mr. Estakhri and his wife. Also includes options to
purchase 3,473,298 shares of our common stock that are
exercisable within 60 days of March 29, 2006, of which
296,322 shares are subject to stock options whose vesting
was fully accelerated on December 7, 2005, but which shares
may not be sold, transferred, encumbered or “hedged”
until the option would otherwise have vested pursuant to the
original vesting terms.
(3)
Includes options to purchase 169,518 shares of our
common stock that are exercisable within 60 days of
March 29, 2006, of which 91,822 shares are subject to
stock options whose vesting was fully accelerated on
December 7, 2005, but which shares may not be sold,
transferred, encumbered or “hedged” until the option
would otherwise have vested pursuant to the original vesting
terms.
(4)
Includes options to purchase 1,264,234 shares of our
common stock that are exercisable within 60 days of
March 29, 2006, of which 183,822 shares are subject to
stock options whose vesting was fully accelerated on
December 7, 2005, but which shares may not be sold,
transferred, encumbered or “hedged” until the option
would otherwise have vested pursuant to the original vesting
terms.
(5)
Includes options held by Mr. Dodds to
purchase 155,208 shares of our common stock that are
exercisable within 60 days of March 29, 2006. Also
includes 3,911,679 shares of our common stock owned by
Thomvest Holdings LLC, of which Mr. Dodds is a Vice
President, and 99,127 shares of our common stock owned by
Thomvest Seed Capital Inc., an affiliate of Thomvest Holdings
LLC. Mr. Dodds disclaims any beneficial interest in these
shares except to the extent of his pecuniary interest in such
shares. The majority of the outstanding voting securities of
Thomvest Holdings LLC are owned, directly or indirectly, by
Peter Thomson. The address of Thomvest Holdings LLC is 65 Queen
Street West, Suite 2400, Toronto, Ontario, M5H 2M8 Canada.
(6)
Represents options to purchase 51,041 shares of our
common stock that are exercisable within 60 days of
March 29, 2006.
(7)
Represents options to purchase 101,208 shares of our
common stock that are exercisable within 60 days of
March 29, 2006.
(8)
Includes options to purchase 23,958 shares of our
common stock that are exercisable within 60 days of
March 29, 2006.
(9)
Represents options to purchase 51,041 shares of our
common stock that are exercisable within 60 days of
March 29, 2006.
(10)
Includes options to purchase an aggregate of
7,320,257 shares of our common stock that are exercisable
within 60 days of March 29, 2006, of which
973,633 shares are subject to stock options whose vesting
was fully accelerated on December 7, 2005, but which shares
may not be sold, transferred, encumbered or “hedged”
until the option would otherwise have vested pursuant to the
original vesting terms.
(11)
Our current executive officers and directors and two entities
affiliated with one of our directors, who collectively
beneficially owned 12,460,735 shares of our common stock as
of March 29, 2006, have entered into voting agreements with
Micron. Under the terms of the voting agreements, these
stockholders have, among other things, agreed to vote, and
granted to Micron an irrevocable proxy to vote, at every annual,
special, adjourned or postponed meeting of our stockholders and
in every written consent in lieu of such meeting (i) in
favor of the proposed merger with Micron, (ii) against any
proposal made in opposition to, or competition with, the
proposed merger with Micron and (iii) against any
acquisition proposal or action that is intended or would
reasonably be expected to impede, interfere with, delay,
postpone, discourage or adversely affect the proposed merger
with Micron. The agreements and the proxies granted under the
voting agreements will expire on the earlier to occur of
(i) the date on which the proposed merger with Micron is
effective under the terms of the merger agreement or
(ii) the date on which the merger agreement is terminated
pursuant to Article VII of the merger agreement.
Micron expressly disclaims beneficial ownership of all of these
shares. Micron’s address is 8000 South Federal Way, Boise,
Idaho83716.
(12)
Consists of 4,291,463 shares held for the account of Glenview
Capital Master Fund, 2,052,859 shares held for the account of
Glenview Institutional Partners, 381,600 shares held for the
account of GCM Little Arbor Master Fund, 369,192 shares held for
the account of Glenview Capital Partners, 100,700 shares held
for the account of GCM Little Arbor Institutional Fund and 6,300
shares held for the account of GCM Little Arbor Partners.
Glenview Capital Management, LLC manages the investment
activities of each of these funds, Glenview Capital GP, LLC
serves as the general partner of each of these funds and
Lawrence M. Robbins serves as the Chief Executive Officer of
Glenview Capital Management, LLC and Glenview Capital GP, LLC,
and in such capacities, Glenview Capital Management, LLC,
Glenview Capital GP, LLC and Mr. Roberts may be deemed to have
sole power to direct the voting and disposition of all of these
shares. The address for each of Glenview Capital Management,
LLC, Glenview Capital GP, LLC and Mr. Robbins is 399 Park
Avenue, Floor 39, New York, New York10022. The address for
Glenview Capital Master Fund is Harbour Centre, North Church
Street, P.O. Box 8966T, George Town, Grand Cayman, Cayman
Islands, British West Indies. We obtained this information from
a Schedule 13D filed with the SEC by each of these reporting
persons on March 16, 2006.
(13)
Consists of 4,044,441 shares held by Rocker Partners, L.P. and
3,004,130 shares held by Compass Holdings, Ltd. Mr. Rocker is
the sole managing partner of Rocker Partners, L.P. and is the
president of Rocker Offshore Management Company, the investment
advisor to Compass Holdings, Ltd., and as a result of these
relationships, possesses sole power to direct the voting and
disposition of all of these shares. Mr. Rocker’s address is
c/o Rocker Partners, L.P., 374 Millburn Avenue, Suite 205E,
Millburn, New Jersey, 07041. We obtained this ownership
information for Mr. Rocker from a Schedule 13G filed with the
SEC by Mr. Rocker on February 13, 2006.
(14)
Consists of 6,450,000 shares held by D. E. Shaw Valence
Portfolios, L.L.C., 3,000 shares that D. E. Shaw Valence, L.L.C.
has the right to acquire through the exercise of listed call
options and 496 shares held by D. E. Shaw Meniscus Portfolios,
L.L.C. David E. Shaw’s is the President and sole
shareholder of D. E. Shaw & Co., Inc., which is the general
partner of D. E. Shaw & Co., L.P., which in turn is the
managing member and investment adviser of D. E. Shaw Valence
Portfolios, L.L.C., the managing member of D. E. Shaw Valence,
L.L.C., and the investment adviser of D. E. Shaw Meniscus
Portfolios, L.L.C. Mr. Shaw is also the President and sole
shareholder of D. E. Shaw & Co. II, Inc., which is the
managing member of D. E. Shaw & Co., L.L.C., which in turn
is the managing member of D. E. Shaw Meniscus Portfolios, L.L.C.
By virtue of these relationships, Mr. Shaw may be deemed to
possess shared power to direct the voting and disposition of all
of these shares. The address for each of D. E. Shaw & Co.,
L.L.C., D. E. Shaw Valence Portfolios, L.L.C. and David E. Shaw
is 120 W. 45th Street, Tower 45, 39th Floor, New York, New York10036. We obtained this information from a Schedule 13G filed
with the SEC by these reporting persons on March 21, 2006.
(15)
Consists of 2,112,859 shares held by Elliott Associates, L.P.
and 3,171,989 shares held by Elliott International, L.P. Paul E.
Singer, Elliott Capital Advisors, L.P., which is controlled by
Mr. Singer, and Elliott Asset Management LLC, which is
controlled by Mr. Singer, are the general partners of Elliott
Associates, L.P. and may be deemed to have sole voting and
dispositive power as to the shares held by Elliott Associates,
L.P. Elliott International Capital Advisors Inc., which is
controlled by Mr. Singer, is the investment manager for Elliott
International, L.P. and Hambledon, Inc., which is controlled by
Mr. Singer, is the sole general partner of Elliott
International, L.P., and as such they may be deemed to share
voting and dispositive power as to the shares held by Elliott
International, L.P. The address of each of Elliott Associates,
L.P., Elliott International, L.P. and Mr. Singer is 712 Fifth
Avenue, 36th Floor, New York, New York10019. We obtained this
information from a Schedule 13D filed with the SEC by these
reporting persons on March 20, 2006.
(16)
Amphora Limited has indicated to us that it may be deemed to be
an affiliate of each of Amaranth Securities L.L.C. and Amaranth
Global Securities Inc., each of which are registered
broker-dealers. Amphora Limited has indicated to us that it
purchased our 5.625% Senior Convertible Notes due 2010,
or the Notes, in the ordinary course of business, and at the
time of such purchase, had no agreements or understandings,
directly or indirectly, with any person to distribute the Notes
or the shares of common stock issuable upon conversion of the
Notes. Amaranth Advisors L.L.C., the trading advisor for Amphora
Limited, has voting control and/or dispositive power with
respect to the shares of common stock issuable upon conversion
of the Notes. Nicholas M. Maounis is the managing member of
Amaranth Advisors L.L.C. Each of Mr. Maounis and Amaranth
Advisors L.L.C. disclaim beneficial ownership of the shares
beneficially owned by Amphora Limited, except to the extent of
their pecuniary interest therein. The address of Amphora Limited
is c/o Dundee Leeds Management Services (Cayman) Ltd.,
Waterfront Centre, 28 N. Church Street, George Town,
Grand Cayman, Cayman Islands, British West Indies.
(17)
Represents shares of our common stock issuable upon conversion
of the Notes at the current conversion price of $6.68 per
share. However, this conversion price is subject to adjustment
under certain circumstances, including stock splits, stock
dividends or distributions and other anti-dilution adjustments.
As a result, the amount of common stock issuable upon conversion
of these notes in the future may increase or decrease. The
indenture governing our Notes provides that no holder of the
Notes has the right to convert any portion of the Notes to the
extent that, after giving effect to such conversion, such holder
(together with such holder’s affiliates) would beneficially
own in excess of 4.99% of our common stock outstanding
immediately after giving effect to such conversion. The number
of shares of common stock beneficially owned by Amphora Limited
and Highbridge International LLC does not reflect this
limitation. Due to the conversion limitation, each of Amphora
Limited and Highbridge International LLC would have the right to
convert their $30 million in aggregate principal amount of
Notes into 4,489,674 shares of our common stock, based on
the current conversion price of $6.68 per share, which
would constitute beneficial ownership of approximately 5.45% of
our outstanding common stock. However, due to the conversion
limitation, as of March 29, 2006, each of Amphora Limited
and Highbridge International LLC were permitted to convert their
$35 million in aggregate principal amount of notes into no
more than 4,113,836 shares of our common stock, based on
the current conversion price of $6.68 per share. The
$6.68 per share conversion price is subject to adjustment
under certain circumstances, including stock splits, stock
dividends or distributions and other anti-dilution adjustments.
As a result, the amount of common stock issuable upon conversion
of the Notes in the future may increase or decrease.
(18)
Highbridge Capital Management, LLC, as the trading manager of
Highbridge International LLC, has voting control and investment
discretion with respect to the shares of common stock issuable
upon conversion of the Notes. Glenn Dubin and Henry Swieca
control Highbridge Capital Management, LLC. Each of
Messrs. Dubin and Swieca and Highbridge Capital Management,
LLC disclaim beneficial ownership of the shares beneficially
owned by Highbridge International LLC, except to the extent of
their pecuniary interest therein. Highbridge International
LLC’s address is 9 West 57th Street,
27th Floor, New York, New York10019.
(19)
Consists of 4,397,500 shares held by GLG North American
Opportunity Fund, 350,000 shares held by GLG Market Neutral
Fund, 252,500 shares held by GLG Technology Fund, 112,954 shares
held by Lyxor North American Alternative Equity Fund Ltd.,
30,032 shares held by CITI GLG North American Hedge Fund Ltd.,
7,718 shares held by GLG Equities Long-Short CI, 5,037 shares
held by Lyxor/GLG Pan European Equity Fund Ltd. and 1,750 shares
held by CITI GLG European Hedge Fund Ltd. GLG Partners LP is the
investment manager of each of these funds and has voting and
dispositive power over these shares. The general partner of GLG
Partners LP is GLG Partners Limited, the managing directors of
which are Noam Gottesman, Pierre Lagrange and Emmanuel Roman. As
a result, each of Messrs. Gottesman, Lagrange and Roman has
voting and dispositive power over these shares. The address for
each of GLG North American Opportunity Fund, GLG Partners LP,
GLG Partners Limited and Messrs. Gottesman, Lagrange and Roman
is 1 Curzon Street, London W1J 5HB, England. We obtained this
information from a Schedule 13G filed with the SEC by these
reporting persons on March 22, 2006.
(20)
Consists of an aggregate of 4,755,024 shares held by FrontPoint
Value Discovery Fund, L.P., FrontPoint Value Horizons Fund, L.P.
and Ivory Capital, Ltd. (the ‘Funds‘), 209,504 shares
held by FVH Ivory
Accredited, L.P. (‘FVH‘), 62,256 shares held by Ivory
Capital II, L.P. (‘Ivory Capital II‘) and 23,216
shares held by Ivory Capital, L.P. (‘Ivory Capital
II‘). Ivory Investment Manager, L.P. is the investment
manager to each of these funds, IIM GP, LLC is the general
partner of Ivory Investment Manager, L.P. and Curtis G.
Macnguyen is a managing member of IIM GP, LLC. As a result of
these relationships, each of these persons has shared voting and
dispositive power over all of the shares held by the Funds,
Ivory Capital, Ivory Capital II and FVH. Ivory Capital Advisors,
LLC is the general partner of Ivory Capital, Ivory Capital II
and FVH, and Ivory Capital Group, LLC is the managing member of
Ivory Capital Advisors, LLC. As such, Ivory Capital Advisors,
LLC and Ivory Capital Group, LLC have the power to direct the
affairs of Ivory Capital, Ivory Capital II and FVH and has
shared voting and dispositive power over the shares held by
these funds. The address of each of Ivory Investment Management,
L.P., IIM GP, LLC, Mr. Macnguyen, Ivory Capital Advisors, LLC,
Ivory Capital Group, LLC, Ivory Capital, Ivory Capital II and
FVH is 11755 Wilshire Boulevard, Los Angeles, California90025.
We obtained this information from a Schedule 13G filed with the
SEC by these reporting persons on February 27, 2006.
(21)
Consists of 2,726,705 shares held by Icahn Partners Master Fund
LP and 2,214, 035 shares held by Icahn Partners LP. CCI Offshore
Corp. is the general partner of Icahn Offshore LP, which is the
general partner of Icahn Partners Master Fund LP. CCI Onshore
Corp. is the general partner of Icahn Onshore LP, which is the
general partner of Icahn Partners LP. Each of CCI Offshore Corp.
and CCI Onshore Corp. is wholly owned by Carl C. Icahn. As such,
Mr. Icahn holds voting and dispositive power over all of these
shares. The address of each of Mr. Icahn, Icahn Partners Master
Fund LP, Icahn Partners LP, CCI Offshore Corp., Icahn Offshore
LP, CCI Onshore Corp. and Icahn Onshore LP is c/o Icahn
Associates Corp., 767 Fifth Avenue, 47th Floor, New York, NewYork10153. We obtained this information from a Schedule 13D
filed with the SEC by these reporting persons on March 17, 2006.
ITEM 13.
CERTAIN RELATIONSHIPS AND RELATED TRANSACTIONS
Other than the compensation arrangements, including retention
and separation agreements described in Item 11 of this
Report, since January 1, 2005, there has not been, nor is
there currently proposed, any transaction or series of similar
transactions to which we were or will be a party in which the
amount involved exceeded or will exceed $60,000 and in which any
director, executive officer, holder of more than 5% of our
common stock or any member of his or her immediate family had or
will have a direct or indirect material interest.
ITEM 14.
PRINCIPAL ACCOUNTANT FEES AND SERVICES
The following table summarizes the aggregate fees for
professional services rendered for us by PricewaterhouseCoopers
LLP for the years ended December 31, 2004 and 2005:
2004
2005
Audit Fees
$
2,009,445
$
2,506,400
Audit-Related Fees
275,059
348,391
Tax Fees
95,745
73,500
All Other Fees
—
—
Total
$
2,380,249
$
2,928,291
Audit Fees. The audit fees for the years ended
December 31, 2004 and 2005, respectively, were for
professional services rendered for the audits of our
consolidated financial statements, statutory and subsidiary
audits, consents, assistance with review of documents filed with
the SEC and the audit of internal control over our financial
reporting in accordance with Section 404 of the
Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002.
Audit-Related Fees. For the year ended December 31,2004, audit-related fees were for services related to the audit
of third party compliance with contractual obligations to us.
For the year ended December 31, 2005, audit-related fees
were for accounting consultations and services related to the
audit of third party compliance with contractual obligations to
us.
Tax Fees. Tax fees for the years ended December 31,2004 and 2005, respectively, were for services related to tax
compliance, including the preparation of tax returns and tax
planning and tax advice.
All Other Fees. There were no other fees for the years
ended December 31, 2004 and 2005.
Audit Committee Pre-Approval Policies and Procedures. The
services performed by PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP in 2004 and
2005 were pre-approved by our audit committee in accordance with
the requirements of the committee’s charter. Pre-approval
is generally provided at regularly scheduled meetings.
PART IV
ITEM 15
EXHIBITS AND FINANCIAL STATEMENT SCHEDULES
(a) The following documents are filed as part of this
report:
1. Financial Statements — See Index to
Consolidated Financial Statements in Part II, Item 8.
2. Financial Statement Schedule — See
Index to Financial Statement Schedule in Part II,
Item 8.
Certification of Chief Executive Officer Pursuant to
Rule 13a-14 and Rule 15d-14 of the Securities Exchange
Act of 1934
X
31
.2
Certification of Chief Financial Officer Pursuant to
Rule 13a-14 and Rule 15d-14 of the Securities Exchange
Act of 1934
X
32
.1
Certifications of Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial
Officer Pursuant to 18 U.S.C. Section 1350, As Adopted
Pursuant to Section 906 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002
X
+
Indicates that portions of this agreement were granted
confidential treatment by the SEC.
++
Indicates that confidential treatment has been requested for
portions of this agreement.
*
Indicates a management contract or compensatory plan or
arrangement.
Pursuant to the requirements of Section 13 or 15(d) of the
Securities Exchange Act of 1934, the Registrant has duly caused
this report to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned,
thereunto duly authorized.
Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Exchange Act of
1934, this report has been signed below by the following persons
on behalf of the Registrant and in the capacities and on the
dates indicated.
Transfers represent estimated product returns and discounts of
$5.5 million and $3.2 million charged to deferred
product margin for the years ended December 31, 2004 and
December 31, 2005, respectively. Transfers represent
estimated product returns of $3.2 million and estimated
discounts of $2.3 million charged to deferred product
margin.
Certification of Chief Executive Officer Pursuant to
Rule 13a-14 and Rule 15d-14 of the Securities Exchange
Act of 1934
31
.2
Certification of Chief Financial Officer Pursuant to
Rule 13a-14 and Rule 15d-14 of the Securities Exchange
Act of 1934
32
.1
Certifications of Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial
Officer Pursuant to 18 U.S.C. Section 1350, As Adopted
Pursuant to Section 906 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002
Dates Referenced Herein and Documents Incorporated by Reference